Juniper CBL-M40-PWR-AU power cable

M40™ Internet
Router
Hardware Guide
Juniper Networks, Inc.
1194 North Mathilda Avenue
Sunnyvale, CA 94089
USA
408-745-2000
www.juniper.net
Part Number: 530-007249-01, Revision 4
This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine, developed by Epilogue Technology, an Integrated Systems Company. Copyright © 1986–1997, Epilogue
Technology Corporation. All rights reserved. This program and its documentation were developed at private expense, and no part of them is in the public
domain.
This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes, copyright © 1988, 1989, 1993, University of Toronto.
This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California, Berkeley, and its contributors. All of the documentation and software
included in the 4.4BSD and 4.4BSD-Lite Releases is copyrighted by The Regents of the University of California. Copyright © 1979, 1980, 1983, 1986, 1988,
1989, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994. The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
GateD software copyright © 1995, The Regents of the University. All rights reserved. Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 3.0 by
Cornell University and its collaborators. Gated is based on Kirton’s EGP, UC Berkeley’s routing daemon (routed), and DCN’s HELLO routing protocol.
Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1988, Regents of the
University of California. All rights reserved. Portions of the GateD software copyright © 1991, D. L. S. Associates.
This product includes software developed by Maker Communications, Inc., Copyright © 1996, 1997, Maker Communications, Inc.
Juniper Networks is registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and in other countries as a trademark of Juniper Networks, Inc. Broadband Cable
Processor, ERX, ESP, G1, G10, G-series, Internet Processor, JUNOS, JUNOScript, M5, M10, M20, M40, M40e, M160, M-series, NMC-RX, SDX, ServiceGuard,
T320, T640, T-series, UMC, and Unison are trademarks of Juniper Networks, Inc. All other trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered
service marks are the property of their respective owners.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Copyright © 2003, Juniper Networks, Inc.
All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
Writer:Tony Mauro
Editor: Stella Hackell
Illustrations: Faith Bradford
Covers and template design: Edmonds Design
Revision History
30 June 2003—Applied new template, corrected problem report issues.
14 February 2003—Removed information about PC card.
7 October 2002—Added new component information and made minor edits.
12 March 2002—Changed book title and added PIC-related information.
15 October 2001—Added FPC installation caution and applied new templates.
15 January 2001—Added new information.
21 September 2000—Added new Routing Engine information.
12 April 2000—Made minor edits.
28 February 2000—Added information about Channelized OC-12 PIC and Fast Ethernet. Applied new templates and covers.
19 March 1999—Added updates about power supplies.
6 November 1998—Added more safety warnings and information about cabling DC power supplies.
30 October 1998—Added DC power supply notices.
18 September 1998—First edition.
The information in this document is current as of the date listed in the revision history.
Juniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document. Juniper Networks reserves the right to change, modify, transfer or
otherwise revise this publication without notice.
Products made or sold by Juniper Networks (including the G10 CMTS, M5, M10, M20, M40, M40e, and M160 routers, T320 router, T640 routing node, and
the JUNOS software) or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks:
U.S. Patent Nos. 5,473,599, 5,905,725, 5,909,440, 6,333,650, 6,359,479, and 6,406,312.
YEAR 2000 NOTICE
Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant. The JUNOS software has no known time-related limitations through the year
2038. However, the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2036.
ii
Table of Contents
About This Manual
Objectives ........................................................................................................... xvii
Audience............................................................................................................. xvii
Document Organization..................................................................................... xviii
List of Technical Publications ............................................................................. xviii
Documentation Conventions ................................................................................xx
Contact Juniper Networks .....................................................................................xx
Documentation Feedback ....................................................................................xxi
Part
1
Product Overview
Chapter
System1Overview .....................................................................................................3
System Description.................................................................................................3
Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)................................................................................4
Component Redundancy ........................................................................................4
Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines.....................................................5
System Specifications .............................................................................................5
Chapter
2 Component Overview .....................................................................7
Hardware
Chassis....................................................................................................................8
Packet Forwarding Engine ......................................................................................9
Backplane ......................................................................................................10
Physical Interface Cards (PICs) ......................................................................10
PIC Components ....................................................................................11
Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)..................................................................11
FPC Components....................................................................................12
System Control Board (SCB) ..........................................................................13
SCB Components....................................................................................13
Routing Engine .....................................................................................................15
Routing Engine Components .........................................................................15
Table of Contents
iii
Craft Interface ......................................................................................................17
FPC LEDs and Offline Button.........................................................................18
Alarm Relay Contacts, LEDs, and Cutoff Button.............................................18
LCD ...............................................................................................................19
Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports ......................................................19
Power Supplies .....................................................................................................20
AC Power Supply...........................................................................................21
DC Power Supply...........................................................................................22
Power Supply LEDs .......................................................................................22
Cooling System.....................................................................................................23
Cooling System Components.........................................................................23
Airflow through the Chassis...........................................................................24
Cable Management System ..................................................................................24
Chapter
JUNOS3
Internet Software Overview ...........................................................25
Routing Engine Software Components .................................................................26
Routing Protocol Process ...............................................................................26
Routing Protocols ...................................................................................26
Routing and Forwarding Tables..............................................................28
Routing Policy ........................................................................................28
Interface Process ...........................................................................................29
SNMP and MIB II Processes ...........................................................................29
Management Process ....................................................................................29
Routing Engine Kernel...................................................................................29
Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software ................................................30
Software Monitoring Tools....................................................................................30
Software Upgrades ...............................................................................................30
Chapter
System4Architecture Overview ..................................................................... 31
Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture ................................................................32
Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine .........................................33
Routing Engine Architecture .................................................................................33
Routing Engine Functions..............................................................................34
iv
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Part
2
Initial Installation
Chapter
5 the Site .....................................................................................................39
Prepare
Rack Requirements...............................................................................................39
Rack Size and Strength ..................................................................................40
Spacing of Mounting Holes ............................................................................41
Connection to Building Structure ...................................................................41
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance .........................42
Site Environmental Requirements ........................................................................43
Fire Safety Requirements......................................................................................43
Fire Suppression ............................................................................................43
Fire Suppression Equipment..........................................................................44
Power System Requirements and Specifications...................................................44
Power Supply Load Sharing, Redundancy, and Replacement ........................45
Connection and Grounding Requirements .....................................................45
AC Power Cord Specifications........................................................................45
DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications ..............................................46
System Power Requirements.........................................................................48
Site Electrical Wiring and Cable Guidelines ...........................................................49
Distance Limitations for Signaling .................................................................49
Radio Frequency Interference........................................................................49
Electromagnetic Compatibility.......................................................................49
Fiber-Optic and Network Cable Guidelines............................................................49
Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber .................................................................50
Attenuation and Dispersion ...........................................................................50
Power Budget Calculation ..............................................................................51
Power Margin Calculation ..............................................................................51
Attenuate to Prevent Saturation at SONET/SDH PICs .....................................53
Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications .......................................53
Site Preparation Checklist .....................................................................................54
Chapter
6
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information ...............................55
Definition of Safety Warning Levels ......................................................................55
Safety Guidelines and Warnings............................................................................57
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings .......................................................57
Qualified Personnel Warning..................................................................58
Restricted Access Area Warning ............................................................59
Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings .....................................................60
General Electrical Safety Guidelines ........................................................60
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines ....................................................61
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines ....................................................61
Copper Conductors Warning .................................................................63
DC Power Disconnection Warning .........................................................64
DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning..................................65
DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning .....................................................66
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning ...............................................67
Table of Contents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
v
Grounded Equipment Warning...............................................................68
In Case of Electrical Accident .................................................................68
Backplane Energy Hazard Warning ........................................................68
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning....................................69
Power Disconnection Warning ...............................................................70
TN and IT Power Warning......................................................................71
Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings ..................................................71
Chassis Lifting Guidelines .......................................................................72
Installation Instructions Warning............................................................72
Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings .........................................73
Ramp Warning.......................................................................................76
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings.............................................76
General Laser Safety Guidelines..............................................................77
Class 1 Laser Product Warning...............................................................77
Class 1 LED Product Warning.................................................................78
Laser Beam Warning ..............................................................................78
Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning.......................................79
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings .....................79
Battery Handling Warning......................................................................80
Jewelry Removal Warning ......................................................................81
Lightning Activity Warning.....................................................................82
Operating Temperature Warning ...........................................................83
Product Disposal Warning ......................................................................84
Agency Approvals.................................................................................................84
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements....................................................86
Canada ..........................................................................................................86
European Community ...................................................................................86
Japan .............................................................................................................86
Taiwan ..........................................................................................................86
United States .................................................................................................86
Chapter
7 to Install the Router .........................................................................89
Prepare
Tools Required......................................................................................................89
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings ..............................................................90
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge Damage...............................................................91
Unpack the Router................................................................................................92
Rack-Mounting Brackets .......................................................................................94
Chapter
Install 8
the Router and Configure Software ..........................................97
Tools and Parts Required......................................................................................97
Install the Router Using a Mechanical Lift .............................................................98
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift ................................................99
Remove Components from the Chassis .......................................................100
Remove the Power Supplies .................................................................101
Remove the Routing Engine Housing ...................................................102
Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly .................................................102
Remove the Fan Tray ...........................................................................103
Remove the Cable Management System ..............................................104
vi
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Remove the FPCs .................................................................................105
Remove the SCB ..................................................................................106
Remove the Air Filter ..........................................................................107
Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly .................................................108
Install the Chassis into the Rack .................................................................109
Reinstall Components into the Chassis ........................................................111
Reinstall the Lower Impeller Assembly .................................................111
Reinstall the Air Filter ..........................................................................112
Reinstall the SCB .................................................................................113
Reinstall the FPCs.................................................................................114
Reinstall the Cable Management System ..............................................115
Reinstall the Fan Tray...........................................................................116
Reinstall the Upper Impeller Assembly .................................................117
Reinstall the Routing Engine Housing ...................................................117
Reinstall the Power Supplies.................................................................118
Connect the Router to Management and Alarm Devices .....................................119
Connect to a Network for Out-of-Band Management ...................................120
Connect to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device...............................120
Connect to an External Alarm-Reporting Device ..........................................121
Connect PIC Cables.............................................................................................121
Provide Power to the Router ...............................................................................122
Connect Power to an AC-Powered Router....................................................123
Connect Power to a DC-Powered Router .....................................................123
Power On the Router ...................................................................................125
Configure the JUNOS Internet Software ..............................................................127
Part
3
Hardware Maintenance and Replacement Procedures
Chapter
9 Maintenance Overview..............................................................133
Hardware
Routine Maintenance Procedures........................................................................133
Replacing FRUs...................................................................................................133
Chapter
10and Replace the Power Supplies ........................................135
Maintain
Tools and Parts Required ....................................................................................135
Maintain the Power Supplies...............................................................................135
Replace an AC Power Supply ..............................................................................136
Remove an AC Power Supply ......................................................................137
Install an AC Power Supply..........................................................................138
Disconnect and Connect AC Power.....................................................................140
Disconnect AC Power from the Router ........................................................140
Connect AC Power to the Router .................................................................140
Replace a DC Power Supply ................................................................................141
Remove a DC Power Supply ........................................................................142
Install a DC Power Supply............................................................................144
Table of Contents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
vii
Disconnect and Connect DC Power ....................................................................147
Disconnect DC Power from the Router........................................................147
Connect DC Power to the Router.................................................................149
Chapter
11and Replace Cooling System Components....................153
Maintain
Tools and Parts Required....................................................................................153
Maintain and Replace the Air Filter.....................................................................154
Remove the Air Filter ..................................................................................154
Install the Air Filter ......................................................................................155
Maintain and Replace the Fan Tray ....................................................................155
Remove the Fan Tray ..................................................................................156
Install the Fan Tray......................................................................................156
Maintain the Impeller Assemblies ......................................................................157
Replace the Lower Impeller Assembly ................................................................158
Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly ........................................................158
Install the Lower Impeller Assembly............................................................159
Replace the Upper Impeller Assembly ................................................................159
Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly ........................................................159
Install the Upper Impeller Assembly ............................................................160
Chapter
12
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine
Components ............................................................................................................ 161
Tools and Parts Required....................................................................................161
Maintain FPCs and PICs .....................................................................................162
Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC ......................................................................163
Remove an FPC or Quad-wide PIC ..............................................................163
Install an FPC or Quad-wide PIC..................................................................165
Replace a PIC......................................................................................................167
Remove a PIC..............................................................................................167
Install a PIC .................................................................................................168
Maintain the SCB ................................................................................................169
Replace the SCB..................................................................................................169
Remove the SCB..........................................................................................170
Install the SCB .............................................................................................171
Chapter
13and Replace Routing Engine Components.....................173
Maintain
Tools and Parts Required....................................................................................173
Maintain the Routing Engine ..............................................................................174
Replace the Routing Engine Housing ..................................................................174
Remove the Routing Engine Housing ..........................................................175
Install the Routing Engine Housing ..............................................................175
viii
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace the Routing Engine ................................................................................176
Remove the Routing Engine ........................................................................177
Install the Routing Engine............................................................................178
Replace the LS-120 Drive ....................................................................................180
Chapter
14and Replace Cables and Connectors .................................181
Maintain
Tools and Parts Required ....................................................................................181
Cable Specifications ............................................................................................182
Maintain PIC Cables ............................................................................................182
Replace PIC Cables .............................................................................................183
Remove a PIC Cable ....................................................................................183
Install a PIC Cable........................................................................................184
Replace Power Supply Cables .............................................................................185
Replace Cables and Wire Connecting to Routing Engine Interface Ports .............186
Replace the Management Ethernet Cable ....................................................186
Replace the Console or Auxiliary Cable........................................................187
Replace Alarm Relay Wire ...........................................................................188
Part
4
Troubleshooting
Chapter
15
Troubleshooting
Overview..............................................................................191
Command-Line Interface ....................................................................................191
LEDs ...................................................................................................................192
LEDs on the Craft Interface..........................................................................192
LEDs on Hardware Components..................................................................192
Hardware and Interface Alarm Messages ............................................................192
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center....................................................194
Chapter
16 the Power Supplies .............................................................195
Troubleshoot
All LEDs on Both Supplies are Off .......................................................................195
All LEDs on One Supply are Off or LED States are not Correct............................195
Chapter
17 the Cooling System .............................................................197
Troubleshoot
Troubleshoot the Fan Tray and Impeller Assemblies...........................................198
Troubleshoot the Power Supply Fans ..................................................................199
Table of Contents
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ix
Chapter
18 the Packet Forwarding Engine Components ...... 201
Troubleshoot
Troubleshoot FPCs..............................................................................................201
Troubleshoot PICs...............................................................................................202
Troubleshoot the SCB .........................................................................................202
Part
5
Appendixes
Appendix
A
Cable Connectors
and Pinouts.................................................................... 207
RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Ethernet Management Port ..............................207
DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Ports .....208
E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts ...........................................................................208
Fast Ethernet 12-port Cable Pinouts ...................................................................211
Appendix
B Connector Cleaning .................................................................. 213
Fiber-Optic
Appendix
C Router or Its Components.................................................... 215
Return the
Return Procedure ...............................................................................................215
Locate Component Serial Numbers.....................................................................216
FPC Serial Number ID Label ........................................................................217
PIC Serial Number ID Label .........................................................................217
Power Supply Serial Number ID Label .........................................................218
Routing Engine Serial Number Label ...........................................................218
SCB Serial Number ID Label ........................................................................219
Pack the Router for Shipment.............................................................................220
Pack Components for Shipment .........................................................................221
Appendix
D
Glossary .....................................................................................................................223
Part
6
Index
Index
Index ............................................................................................................................237
x
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
List
of Figures
List of Figures
Figure 1:
Figure 2:
Figure 3:
Figure 4:
Figure 5:
Figure 6:
Figure 7:
Figure 8:
Figure 9:
Figure 10:
Figure 11:
Figure 12:
Figure 13:
Figure 14:
Figure 15:
Figure 16:
Figure 17:
Figure 18:
Figure 19:
Figure 20:
Figure 21:
Figure 22:
Figure 23:
Figure 24:
Figure 25:
Figure 26:
Figure 27:
Figure 28:
Figure 29:
Figure 30:
Figure 31:
Figure 32:
Figure 33:
Figure 34:
Figure 35:
Figure 36:
Figure 37:
Figure 38:
Figure 39:
Figure 40:
Figure 41:
Figure 42:
Figure 43:
Figure 44:
Front View of Chassis ...........................................................................8
Rear View of Chassis.............................................................................9
The Backplane ....................................................................................10
FPC Installed in Slot FPC7...................................................................12
System Control Board .........................................................................14
Routing Engine ...................................................................................16
Craft Interface.....................................................................................17
AC Power Supply ................................................................................21
DC Power Supply ................................................................................22
Side View of Air Flow through the Chassis ..........................................24
System Architecture............................................................................31
Packet Forwarding Engine Components and Data Flow......................32
Routing Engine Architecture ...............................................................34
Control Packet Handling: Routing and Forwarding Table Updates ......35
Typical Center-Mount Rack .................................................................40
Chassis Dimensions (Top View) and Recommended Clearances.........42
Site Environment Specifications..........................................................43
AC Plug Types.....................................................................................46
DC Power Supply Cable Connectors....................................................46
DC Power Supply Terminal and Grounding Lug ..................................47
Place a Board Component into an Electrostatic Bag ............................92
Contents of the Shipping Crate ...........................................................93
Chassis Showing Mounting Ears..........................................................94
Optional C-Bracket Shelf, Center-Mounting Ears, and Screws .............95
Chassis Side Handles ..........................................................................95
Remove a Power Supply ...................................................................101
Remove the Routing Engine Housing................................................102
Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly..............................................103
Remove the Fan Tray........................................................................103
Remove the Cable Management System Cover.................................104
Remove the Cable Management System...........................................104
Remove an FPC ................................................................................106
Remove the SCB ...............................................................................107
Remove the Air Filter........................................................................108
Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly..............................................108
Install the Chassis in a Rack ..............................................................110
Reinstall the Lower Impeller Assembly .............................................112
Reinstall the Air Filter .......................................................................112
Reinstall the SCB...............................................................................113
Reinstall an FPC................................................................................115
Reinstall the Cable Management System ..........................................115
Reinstall the Cable Management System Cover ................................116
Reinstall the Fan Tray .......................................................................116
Reinstall the Upper Impeller Assembly .............................................117
xi
Figure 45: Reinstall the Routing Engine Housing ...............................................118
Figure 46: Reinstall a Power Supply...................................................................119
Figure 47: Routing Engine Interface Ports on the Craft Interface .......................119
Figure 48: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector ........................................120
Figure 49: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector.....................................120
Figure 50: Connect Cable to a PIC .....................................................................122
Figure 51: DC Power Switch in the Off Position.................................................124
Figure 52: Attach Cables to the DC Power Supply..............................................125
Figure 53: Remove an AC Power Supply............................................................138
Figure 54: Install an AC Power Supply ...............................................................139
Figure 55: Flip the Power Switch on a DC Power Supply to the OFF Position ....142
Figure 56: Remove the Protective Shield from the Terminal Studs ....................143
Figure 57: Remove Cables from a DC Power Supply..........................................143
Figure 58: Remove a DC Power Supply .............................................................144
Figure 59: Install a DC Power Supply.................................................................145
Figure 60: Remove the Protective Shield from the Terminal Studs ....................145
Figure 61: Attach Cables to a DC Power Supply.................................................146
Figure 62: Flip the Power Switch on a DC Power Supply to the OFF Position ....148
Figure 63: Remove Cables from a DC Power Supply..........................................148
Figure 64: Power Switch on a DC Power Supply in the OFF Position .................150
Figure 65: Remove the Protective Shield from the Terminal Studs ....................150
Figure 66: Attach Cables to a DC Power Supply.................................................151
Figure 67: Remove the Air Filter........................................................................154
Figure 68: Install the Air Filter ...........................................................................155
Figure 69: Remove the Fan Tray........................................................................156
Figure 70: Install the Fan Tray ...........................................................................157
Figure 71: Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly..............................................158
Figure 72: Install the Lower Impeller Assembly .................................................159
Figure 73: Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly..............................................160
Figure 74: Install the Upper Impeller Assembly .................................................160
Figure 75: Remove an FPC ................................................................................164
Figure 76: Install an FPC....................................................................................166
Figure 77: Remove a PIC ...................................................................................168
Figure 78: Install a PIC.......................................................................................169
Figure 79: Remove the SCB ...............................................................................170
Figure 80: Install the SCB...................................................................................171
Figure 81: Remove the Routing Engine Housing................................................175
Figure 82: Install the Routing Engine Housing ...................................................176
Figure 83: Remove the Routing Engine..............................................................178
Figure 84: Install the Routing Engine .................................................................179
Figure 85: Remove the LS-120 Drive from the Routing Engine Housing ............180
Figure 86: PIC Fiber-Optic Cable Connector.......................................................184
Figure 87: Connect Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC ...................................................185
Figure 88: Routing Engine Interface Ports on the Craft Interface .......................186
Figure 89: Management Port Ethernet Connector..............................................187
Figure 90: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector.....................................187
Figure 91: Fast Ethernet 12-port PIC..................................................................211
Figure 92: VHDCI to RJ-21 Cable .......................................................................211
Figure 93: Microdeposits in the SC Connector Canal..........................................213
Figure 94: Clean the Connectors........................................................................213
Figure 95: Fiber-optic Cable Cleaning Kit...........................................................214
Figure 96: Serial Number ID Label .....................................................................216
Figure 97: FPC Serial Number ID Label..............................................................217
Figure 98: PIC Serial Number ID Label...............................................................217
Figure 99: Power Supply Serial Number ID Label ..............................................218
Figure 100:Routing Engine 333 Serial Number ID Label .....................................218
xii
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Figure 101:Routing Engine 600 Serial Number ID Label .....................................219
Figure 102:Serial Number Label on the System Control Board ...........................219
xiii
xiv
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
List
of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1:
Table 2:
Table 3:
Table 4:
Table 5:
Table 6:
Table 7:
Table 8:
Table 9:
Table 10:
Table 11:
Table 12:
Table 13:
Table 14:
Table 15:
Table 16:
Table 17:
Table 18:
Table 19:
Table 20:
Table 21:
Table 22:
Table 23:
Table 24:
Table 25:
Table 26:
Table 27:
Table 28:
Table 29:
Table 30:
Juniper Networks Technical Documentation .................................... xviii
Field-Replaceable Units.........................................................................4
Physical and Environmental Specifications ...........................................5
States for SCB LEDs ............................................................................15
States for FPC LEDs ............................................................................18
Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Button .................................................19
States for Routing Engine LEDs...........................................................19
AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications...........................................21
DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications .........................................22
States for Power Supply LEDs ............................................................22
Rack Mounting Hole Spacing ..............................................................41
AC Power Cable Specifications............................................................46
DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications ...................................47
System Power Requirements .............................................................48
Calculating Power Budget for SONET/SDH PIC Interfaces ...................51
Estimating Link Loss ...........................................................................52
Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications .....................53
Site Preparation Checklist ...................................................................54
Generic Inventory of Router Components Installed in Chassis ............93
Chassis Component Weights...............................................................99
FPC Removal Checklist .....................................................................105
Chassis Alarm Messages ...................................................................193
SONET Interface Alarm Messages .....................................................194
RJ-45 Connector Pinout.....................................................................207
DB-9 Connector Pinout .....................................................................208
RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Straight) Pinout .......................209
RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Crossover) Pinout....................209
RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Straight) Pinout......................210
RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Crossover) Pinout ..................210
RJ-21 Pin Assignments......................................................................211
List of Tables
xv
List of Tables
xvi
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
About This Manual
This chapter provides a high-level overview of the M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide:
„ Objectives on page xvii
„ Audience on page xvii
„ Document Organization on page xviii
„ List of Technical Publications on page xviii
„ Documentation Conventions on page xx
„ Contact Juniper Networks on page xx
„ Documentation Feedback on page xxi
Objectives
This manual describes hardware installation and basic troubleshooting procedures for the
Juniper Networks M40 Internet router. It explains how to prepare your site for router
installation, unpack and install the hardware, power on the router, perform initial software
configuration, and perform routine maintenance. After completing the installation and basic
configuration procedures covered in this manual, refer to the JUNOS Internet software
configuration guides for information about further JUNOS software configuration.
To obtain additional information about the router—either corrections to information in this
manual or information that might have been omitted from this manual—refer to the release
notes available at the Juniper Networks hardware documentation Web site,
http://www.juniper.net/techpubs/hardware. The most current version of this manual is
available at the same URL.
To order printed copies of this manual or to order a documentation CD-ROM, which contains
this manual, please contact your sales representative.
Audience
This manual is designed for network administrators who are installing and maintaining a
Juniper Networks M40 Internet router, or preparing their site for router installation. It
assumes a broad understanding of networks in general, the Internet in particular, networking
principles, and network configuration. A detailed discussion of these concepts is beyond the
scope of this manual.
About This Manual
xvii
Document Organization
Document Organization
This manual is divided into several parts:
„ Preface, “About This Manual” (this chapter), provides a brief description of the contents
and organization of this manual and describes how to obtain technical support.
„ Part 1, “Product Overview,” provides an overview of the router, describing its hardware
components, the JUNOS Internet software, and the system architecture.
„ Part 2, “Initial Installation,” describes how to prepare your site for router installation,
and how to unpack, install, and power on the router. It describes requirements and
specifications for the installation site, power source, rack, wiring, and cabling. It also
provides detailed safety guidelines and warnings.
„ Part 3, “Hardware Maintenance and Replacement Procedures,” describes general
maintenance procedures for the router and how to maintain and replace the router
components.
„ Part 4, “Troubleshooting,” describes general troubleshooting procedures for the router. It
also tells you how to contact the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center (JTAC).
„ Part 5, “Appendixes,” provides pinout specifications for several cable types, instructions
for cleaning fiber-optic transceivers, instructions for returning the router or components,
and a glossary of terms.
„ Part 6, “Index,” provides an index of the manual.
List of Technical Publications
Table 1 lists the software and hardware books for Juniper Networks routers and describes the
contents of each book.
Table 1: Juniper Networks Technical Documentation
Book
Description
JUNOS Internet Software Configuration Guides
xviii
Feature Guide
Provides a detailed explanation and configuration examples for several of the most
complex features in the JUNOS software.
Getting Started
Provides an overview of the JUNOS software and describes how to install and upgrade the
software. This manual also describes how to configure system management functions
and how to configure the chassis, including user accounts, passwords, and redundancy.
MPLS Applications
Provides an overview of traffic engineering concepts and describes how to configure
traffic engineering protocols.
Multicast
Provides an overview of multicast concepts and describes how to configure multicast
routing protocols.
Network Interfaces and Class of Service
Provides an overview of the network interface and class-of-service functions of the JUNOS
software and describes how to configure the network interfaces on the router.
Network Management
Provides an overview of network management concepts and describes how to configure
various network management features, such as SNMP, accounting options, and cflowd.
Policy Framework
Provides an overview of policy concepts and describes how to configure routing policy,
firewall filters, and forwarding options.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
List of Technical Publications
Book
Description
Routing and Routing Protocols
Provides an overview of routing concepts and describes how to configure routing, routing
instances, and unicast routing protocols.
Services Interfaces
Provides an overview of the services interfaces functions of the JUNOS software and
describes how to configure the services interfaces on the router.
VPNs
Provides an overview of Layer 2 and Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (VPNs), describes
how to configure VPNs, and provides configuration examples.
JUNOS Internet Software References
Operational Mode Command Reference:
Interfaces
Describes the JUNOS Internet software operational mode commands you use to monitor
and troubleshoot network and services interfaces on Juniper Networks M-series and
T-series routers.
Operational Mode Command Reference:
Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and
Management
Describes the JUNOS Internet software operational mode commands you use to monitor
and troubleshoot most aspects of Juniper Networks M-series and T-series routers.
System Log Messages Reference
Describes how to access and interpret system log messages generated by JUNOS software
modules and provides a reference page for each message.
JUNOScript API Documentation
JUNOScript API Guide
Describes how to use the JUNOScript API to monitor and configure Juniper Networks
routers.
JUNOScript API Reference
Provides a reference page for each tag in the JUNOScript API.
JUNOS Internet Software Comprehensive Index
Comprehensive Index
Provides a complete index of all JUNOS Internet software books and the
JUNOScript API Guide.
Hardware Documentation
Hardware Guide
Describes how to install, maintain, and troubleshoot routers and router components.
Each platform has its own hardware guide.
PIC Guide
Describes the router Physical Interface Cards (PICs). Each router platform has its own PIC
guide.
Release Notes
JUNOS Internet Software Release Notes
Provide a summary of new features for a particular software release. Software release
notes also contain corrections and updates to published JUNOS and JUNOScript manuals,
provide information that might have been omitted from the manuals, and describe
upgrade and downgrade procedures.
Hardware Release Notes
Describe the available documentation for the router platform and summarize known
problems with the hardware and accompanying software. Each platform has its own
release notes.
JUNOScope Software
JUNOScope Software Guide
Describes the JUNOScope software graphical user interface (GUI), how to install and
administer the software, and how to use the software to manage router configuration files
and monitor router operations.
About This Manual
xix
Documentation Conventions
Documentation Conventions
This manual uses the following text conventions:
„ Router and router component labels are shown in a sans serif font. In the following
example, MANAGEMENT ETHERNET is the label for the Ethernet management port on
the router:
The 10/100-Mbps Ethernet RJ-45 connector is used for out-of-band management of
the router and is labeled MANAGEMENT ETHERNET.
„ Statements, commands, filenames, directory names, IP addresses, and configuration
hierarchy levels are shown in a sans serif font. In the following example, stub is a
statement name and [edit protocols ospf area area-id] is a configuration hierarchy level:
To configure a stub area, include the stub statement at the
[edit protocols ospf area area-id] hierarchy level.
„ In examples, text that you type literally is shown in bold. In the following example, you
type the words show chassis alarms:
For example, you can use the following command to get information about the
source of an alarm condition:
user@host> show chassis alarms
„ Notes, cautions, and warnings are denoted by the following symbols:
A note indicates information that might be helpful in a
particular situation or that might otherwise be overlooked.
A caution indicates a situation that requires careful
attention. Failure to observe a cautionary note could result
in minor injury or discomfort to you, or serious damage to
the router.
A warning indicates a potentially dangerous situation.
Failure to follow the guidelines in a warning could result in
severe injury or death.
Contact Juniper Networks
For technical support, contact Juniper Networks at support@juniper.net, or at 1-888-314-JTAC
(within the United States) or (+1) 408-745-9500 (from outside the United States).
xx
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Documentation Feedback
Documentation Feedback
We are always interested in hearing from our customers. Please let us know what you like
and do not like about the product documentation, and let us know of any suggestions you
have for improving the documentation. Also, let us know if you find any mistakes in the
documentation. Send your feedback and comments to techpubs-comments@juniper.net.
About This Manual
xxi
Documentation Feedback
xxii
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Part
1
Product Overview
„ System Overview on page 3
„ Hardware Component Overview on page 7
„ JUNOS Internet Software Overview on page 25
„ System Architecture Overview on page 31
1
2
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
1
System Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the M40 Internet router, discussing the following topics:
„ System Description on page 3
„ Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs) on page 4
„ Component Redundancy on page 4
„ Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines on page 5
„ System Specifications on page 5
System Description
The M40 Internet router is a complete routing system that provides high-speed interfaces for
large networks and network applications, such as those supported by Internet backbone
service providers. Application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), a definitive part of the
router design, enable the router to forward data at the high speeds demanded by current
network media.
The router accommodates up to eight Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs), each of which can
be configured with a variety of network media types—altogether providing up to
128 physical interface ports per system. The router height of 35 in. (89 cm) enables stacked
installation of two M40 routers in a single floor-to-ceiling rack, for increased port density per
unit of floor space.
The router’s maximum aggregate throughput is 40 gigabits per second (Gbps). The router
provides very high throughput for any combination of Physical Interface Cards (PICs) that
does not exceed 3 Gbps on an FPC. A combination that exceeds 3 Gbps is supported, but
constitutes oversubscription.
The router architecture cleanly separates control operations from packet forwarding
operations. This design eliminates processing and traffic bottlenecks, permitting the router to
achieve high-performance line rates. Control operations in the router are performed by the
Routing Engine, which runs JUNOS Internet software to handle routing protocols, traffic
engineering, policy, monitoring, policing, and configuration management. Forwarding
operations in the router are performed by the Packet Forwarding Engine, which consists of
hardware, including ASICs, designed by Juniper Networks.
System Overview
3
Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Field-replaceable units (FRUs) are router components that can be replaced at the customer
site. Replacing FRUs requires minimal router downtime. There are three types of FRUs:
„ Hot-removable and hot-insertable FRUs—You can remove and replace these
components without powering down the router or disrupting the routing functions.
„ Hot-pluggable FRUs—You can remove and replace these components without powering
down the router, but the routing functions of the system are interrupted when the
component is removed.
„ FRUs that require powering down the router—You must power down the router before
removing these components.
Table 2 lists the FRUs for the M40 router.
Table 2: Field-Replaceable Units
Hot-Removable and
Hot-Insertable FRUs
Hot-Pluggable FRUs
„ Fan tray assembly
„ Routing Engine
„ Flexible PIC Concentrator
(FPC)
„ System Control Board
(SCB)
FRUs That Require Powering
Down the Router
„ Craft interface
„ Front and rear impeller
assemblies
„ Physical Interface Card
(PIC)
„ Power supply
For FRU replacement instructions, see “Hardware Maintenance and Replacement
Procedures” on page 131.
Component Redundancy
The router is designed so that no single point of failure can cause the entire system to fail.
The following hardware components contribute to system redundancy:
„ Cooling system—When the temperature inside the router is below the acceptable
maximum, the cooling system’s components function at less than full speed. If the
temperature becomes excessive—for example, because a cooling system component is
removed—the SCB automatically increases the speed of the remaining components to
reduce the temperature. The cooling system can function at the higher speed
indefinitely. For more information, see “Cooling System” on page 23.
„ Power supply—The router has two load-sharing power supplies to distribute power to the
other components. If one power supply fails, the second power supply can provide full
power to the router's components indefinitely. For more information, see “Power
Supplies” on page 20.
4
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines
Safety Requirements, Warnings, and Guidelines
To avoid harm to yourself or the router as you install and maintain it, you need to follow the
guidelines for working with and near electrical equipment, as well as the safety procedures
for working with Internet routers. For a discussion of how to make the installation site a safe
environment, see “Prepare the Site” on page 39. For a list of safety warnings, see “Regulatory
Compliance and Safety Information” on page 55 and particularly “Electrical Safety
Guidelines and Warnings” on page 60. However, providing an exhaustive set of guidelines for
working with electrical equipment is beyond the scope of this manual.
System Specifications
Table 3 summarizes physical specifications for the M40 router. For environmental
specifications, see “Site Environmental Requirements” on page 43.
Table 3: Physical and Environmental Specifications
Description
Value
Chassis height
35 in. (89 cm)
Chassis width
19 in. (48 cm)
Chassis depth
23.5 in. (60 cm)
Weight, maximum configuration
280 lb (127 kg)
Weight, minimum configuration
180 lb (81 kg)
Thermal output
3850 BTU/hour
System Overview
5
System Specifications
6
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
2
Hardware Component Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the hardware components on the M40 Internet router:
„ Chassis on page 8
„ Packet Forwarding Engine on page 9
„
Backplane on page 10
„
Physical Interface Cards (PICs) on page 10
„
Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) on page 11
„
System Control Board (SCB) on page 13
„ Routing Engine on page 15
„ Craft Interface on page 17
„ Power Supplies on page 20
„ Cooling System on page 23
„ Cable Management System on page 24
Hardware Component Overview
7
Chassis
Chassis
The router chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other router hardware
components (see Figure 1 and Figure 2). The chassis is 19 in. (48 cm) wide and 23.5 in.
(60 cm) deep. The chassis height of 35 in. (89 cm) enables stacked installation of two M40
routers in a single floor-to-ceiling rack. The two front- or center-mounting ears (one on each
side) enable installation into either a front-mount or a center-mount rack. For more
information, see “Rack Requirements” on page 39.
The chassis includes two electrostatic discharge (ESD) points (banana plug receptacles), one
front and one rear, as shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
Before removing or installing components of a functioning
router, attach an ESD strap to one of the ESD points and
place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist.
Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the
router.
The router must be connected to earth ground during
normal operation.
For further safety information, see “Regulatory
Compliance and Safety Information” on page 55.
Figure 1: Front View of Chassis
Front rack-mounting ear
Cable managment
system
Card cage
Backplane
Slide guides for FPCs
ESD point
Craft interface
Center rack-mounting ear
8
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
1002
Air filter
Packet Forwarding Engine
Figure 2: Rear View of Chassis
Front rack-mounting ear
Center rack-mounting ear
Upper impeller assembly
Fan tray
Routing Engine housing
LS-120 drive
Power supply A
Power supply B
1001
ESD point
Packet Forwarding Engine
The Packet Forwarding Engine is a multicomponent system that uses application-specific
integrated circuits (ASICs) to perform Layer 2 and Layer 3 packet switching, route lookups,
and packet forwarding. The ASICs include the Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC, I/O Manager
ASIC, Internet Processor or Internet Processor II ASIC, and various media-specific controllers.
The Packet Forwarding Engine has the following components:
„ Backplane—Forms the rear of the FPC card cage, distributes power from the power
supplies, and transfers packets and signals between router components, which plug into
it.
„ Physical Interface Cards (PICs)—Physically connect the router to network media such as
OC-12 ATM, OC-12 and OC-48 SONET/SDH, Channelized OC-12, and Gigabit Ethernet.
PICs are housed in FPCs.
„ Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)—Process incoming and outgoing packets. From one to
eight FPCs can plug into the backplane from the front of the chassis. Each FPC
accommodates up to four Physical Interface Cards (PICs).
„ System Control Board (SCB)—Performs route lookup, filtering, and switching. The SCB
installs into the backplane from the front of the chassis.
Hardware Component Overview
9
Packet Forwarding Engine
Backplane
The backplane is a panel that forms the back of the FPC card cage (see Figure 3). The SCB
and all the FPCs install into the backplane from the front of the chassis. The backplane
contains a temperature sensor and is cooled by three fans operating in unison. It also
contains an EEPROM that stores the serial number and revision level of the backplane.
The backplane performs the following functions:
„ Power distribution—The backplane distributes power to all router components from the
power supplies attached to it.
„ Signal connectivity—The backplane transports the signals exchanged by system
components for monitoring and control purposes.
„ Management of shared memory on the FPCs—One Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC on
the backplane uniformly allocates incoming data packets throughout shared memory on
the FPCs.
„ Transfer of outgoing data cells to the FPCs—A second Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC
on the backplane passes data cells to the FPCs for reassembly into packets when the
data is ready to be transmitted.
Figure 3: The Backplane
1048
Backplane
Physical Interface Cards (PICs)
Physical Interface Cards (PICs) are housed on Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) and
physically connect the router to network media. For information about FPCs, see “Flexible
PIC Concentrators (FPCs)” on page 11. The router supports various PICs, including ATM,
Channelized OC-12/STM-4, Gigabit Ethernet, and SONET/SDH interfaces. Up to four PICs
install in each FPC. The PIC slots are numbered 0 (zero) through 3, top to bottom.
PICs receive incoming packets from the network and transmit outgoing packets to the
network, performing framing and line-speed signaling for their media type as required. PICs
also encapsulate outgoing packets received from the FPCs before transmitting them. The
controller ASIC on each PIC performs additional control functions specific to the PIC media
type.
10
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Packet Forwarding Engine
A regular PIC is hot-removable and hot-insertable in the sense that its absence does not
disrupt routing functions; however, you must completely remove its host FPC from the
chassis before removing the PIC, which affects all PICs on the FPC. For replacement
instructions, see “Replace a PIC” on page 167.
Quad-wide PICs, such as the 4-port Gigabit Ethernet and OC-48/STM-16 SONET/SDH PICs,
occupy an entire FPC slot and are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in
“Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 4. The instructions for replacing a quad-wide PIC
are the same as for an FPC. See “Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC” on page 163.
PIC Components
Most PICs supported on the M40 router have the following components, but for complete
specifications see the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC Guide. For information about pinouts
for PIC cable connectors, see “Cable Connectors and Pinouts” on page 207.
„ One or more cable connector ports—Accept a network media connector.
„ LEDs—Indicate PIC and port status. Most PICs have an LED labeled STATUS on the PIC
faceplate. Some PICs have additional LEDs, often one per port. The meaning of the LED
states differs for various PICs. For more information, see the M20 and M40 Internet
Routers PIC Guide.
Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)
Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) house the PICs that connect the router to network media
(for information about PICs, see “Physical Interface Cards (PICs)” on page 10). Up to eight
FPCs install vertically into the backplane from the front of the chassis. The FPC slots are
numbered left to right, from 0 (zero) through 7. Each FPC accommodates up to four PICs and
the PIC slots in each FPC are numbered from 0 (zero) through 3, top to bottom.
An FPC can be installed into any FPC slot, regardless of the PICs it contains, and any
combination of slots can be used. If a slot is empty, you must install a blank FPC panel to
shield it, so that cooling air can circulate properly throughout the card cage. Figure 4, which
shows a chassis with an FPC in slot 7, omits the blank FPC panels to show the FPC’s position
in the card cage.
The main function of an FPC is to connect the PICs installed in it to the other router
components. The I/O Manager ASIC on the FPC divides each incoming data packet into
64-byte cells, which the Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC on the backplane distributes among
the memory buffers located on and shared by all installed FPCs. After the SCB decides how to
forward a packet, the I/O Manager ASIC on the FPC reassembles the corresponding data cells
back into network-packet form and passes the packet to the appropriate PIC for transmission
to the network. For more information, see “Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding
Engine” on page 33.
FPCs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)”
on page 4. When you remove or install an FPC, packet forwarding halts for about 200 ms
while the Packet Forwarding Engine adjusts to the change in the amount of memory available
in the pool located on and shared by all FPCs. When you install an FPC into a functioning
router, press its offline button to activate it and the PICs installed in it. The Routing Engine
downloads the FPC software, the FPC runs its diagnostics, and the PICs housed on the FPC
are enabled. Forwarding continues uninterrupted during this process. For FPC replacement
instructions, see “Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC” on page 163.
Hardware Component Overview
11
Packet Forwarding Engine
The PICs that install on both types of FPC are also hot-removable and hot-insertable. For
more information, see “Physical Interface Cards (PICs)” on page 10.
Figure 4: FPC Installed in Slot FPC7
STATUS
RX
TX
7
1059
LINE
Y
RX ACTIVIT
FPC Components
Each FPC contains the following components:
„ FPC card carrier—Houses the other FPC components.
„ I/O Manager ASIC—Parses Layer 2 and Layer 3 data and performs encapsulation and
segmentation.
„ Two identical SDRAM dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)—Form the memory pool
shared with the other FPCs installed in the router.
„ Parity-protected SSRAM—Stores data structures used by the I/O Manager ASIC.
„ Processor subsystem—Manages packet handling in the FPC and communication with
the SCB. It is a PowerPC 603e-based CPU with parity-protected DRAM.
„ EEPROM—Stores the serial number and revision level of the FPC.
„ Two LEDs—Indicate FPC status. There is a green one labeled OK and a red one labeled
FAIL. The LEDs for each FPC are located directly below it, on the router craft interface.
For more information, see “FPC LEDs and Offline Button” on page 18.
„ Offline button—Prepares the FPC for removal from the router when pressed. Like the
LEDs, an offline button is located on the craft interface directly below each FPC slot. For
more information, see “FPC LEDs and Offline Button” on page 18.
„ Extractor clips—Control the locking system that secures the FPC in the card cage.
12
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Packet Forwarding Engine
System Control Board (SCB)
The System Control Board (SCB) performs route lookup, filtering, and switching on incoming
data packets, then directs outbound packets to the appropriate FPC for transmission to the
network. It occupies the center slot of the card cage, installing into the backplane from the
front of the chassis (see Figure 1).
The SCB is hot-pluggable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 4. For
SCB replacement instructions, see “Replace the SCB” on page 169.
The SCB performs the following functions:
„ Route lookups—The Internet Processor or Internet Processor II ASIC on the SCB
performs route lookups using the forwarding table stored in the synchronous SRAM
(SSRAM). After performing the lookup, the ASIC informs the backplane of the forwarding
decision, and the backplane forwards the decision to the appropriate outgoing interface.
„ Monitoring and control of router components—The SCB collects statistics from all
sensors in the system. When it detects a failure or alarm condition, it sends a signal to
the Routing Engine, which generates control messages or sets an alarm. The SCB also
relays control messages from the Routing Engine to the router components.
„ Transfer of exception and control packets—The Internet Processor or Internet Processor
II ASIC passes exception packets to the microprocessor on the SCB, which processes
almost all of them. The SCB sends any remaining exception packets to the Routing
Engine for further processing. When the SCB detects an error originating in the Packet
Forwarding Engine, it sends it to the Routing Engine using system logging (syslog)
messages.
„ Control of FPC resets—If the SCB detects errors in an FPC, it attempts to reset the FPC.
After three unsuccessful reset attempts, the SCB takes the FPC offline and informs the
Routing Engine. Other FPCs are unaffected, and system operation continues.
SCB Components
The SCB (shown in Figure 5) has the following components:
„ One Internet Processor or Internet Processor II ASIC—Performs route lookups and
makes routing decisions.
„ Parity-protected SSRAM—Stores the forwarding table.
„ Processor subsystem—Manages SCB functions and handles exception packets. The
processor has the following components:
„
One PowerPC 603e processor
„
Parity-protected Level 2 cache
„
Parity-protected DRAM
„ EEPROM—Stores the serial number and revision level.
Hardware Component Overview
13
Packet Forwarding Engine
„ 19.44-MHz stratum 3 reference clock—Generates clock signal for SONET/SDH PICs.
„ I2C controller—Monitors the status of router components.
„ Debug port—Connects the SCB to a laptop or other monitoring device through an
RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable. It uses a DB-25 connector.
„ Four LEDs—Indicate SCB status. There are two green ones labeled ACTIVE and RUN, and
two amber ones labeled STAT1 and STAT2. Table 4 describes the LED states.
„ Reset switch—Restarts the SCB when pressed, causing the Packet Forwarding Engine to
reset and halting packet forwarding for up to approximately two minutes. Do not use the
reset switch under normal circumstances; to access it, push the end of a paper clip or
other small probing device through the hole in the SCB faceplate.
„ Extractor clips—Control the locking system that secures the SCB in the chassis.
For specific information about SCB components (for
example, the amount of SSRAM and DRAM), issue the
show chassis scb command.
Figure 5: System Control Board
Access to
reset switch
LEDs
1005
Debug port
14
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Routing Engine
Table 4: States for SCB LEDs
Label
Color
State
Description
ACTIVE
Green
Flashing (pulsed with out-time
proportional to traffic)
I/O interrupts are occurring.
RUN
Green
Blinking
SCB processor is running. Normally, the
blinking is faint and becomes bright only when
the SCB is processing many exceptions.
STAT1
Amber
Flashing
Internal diagnostics are running.
STAT2
Routing Engine
The Routing Engine is an Intel-based PCI platform that runs JUNOS Internet software.
Software processes that run on the Routing Engine maintain the routing tables, manage the
routing protocols used on the router, control the router's interfaces, control some chassis
components, and provide the interface for system management and user access to the
router.
The Routing Engine installs into the rear of the chassis, in a compartment behind the card
cage (see Figure 2). For information about the routing architecture, see “System Architecture
Overview” on page 31.
The Routing Engine is hot-pluggable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on
page 4. For replacement instructions, see “Maintain and Replace Routing Engine
Components” on page 173.
Routing Engine Components
The Routing Engine (shown in Figure 6) is a two-board system with the following
components:
„ CPU—Runs JUNOS Internet software to maintain the router’s routing tables and routing
protocols. It has a Pentium-class processor.
„ SDRAM—Provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing
Engine processes.
„ Compact flash drive—Provides primary storage for software images, configuration files,
and microcode. The drive is fixed and inaccessible from outside the router.
„ Hard drive—Provides secondary storage for log files, memory dumps, and rebooting the
system if the flash drive fails.
„ PC card slot—Accepts a removable PC card, which stores software images for system
upgrades.
„ Interfaces for out-of-band management access—Provide information about Routing
Engine status to devices (console, laptop, or terminal server) that can be attached to
access ports located on the craft interface.
„ EEPROM—Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine.
Hardware Component Overview
15
Routing Engine
„ LED—Indicates disk activity for the internal IDE interface. It does not necessarily
indicate routing-related activity.
The LEDs that report Routing Engine status are on the craft interface rather than the
Routing Engine faceplate. See “Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports” on page 19.
„ Reset button—Reboots the Routing Engine when pressed.
„ Extractor clips—Control the locking system that secures the Routing Engine in the
chassis.
The appearance and position of electronic components or
the PC card slot on your Routing Engine might differ from
the figures in this section. These differences do not affect
Routing Engine installation and removal or functionality.
For specific information about components in a Routing
Engine (for example, the capacity of the hard disk), issue
the show chassis routing-engine command.
Although the Routing Engine has a PC card slot, it is
disabled on the M40 router. The router instead uses an
LS-120 disk.
Figure 6: Routing Engine
Extractor clip
Extractor clip
JUNI
PER
NETW
ORKS
LABE
L TH
IS SID
HD
E
RESET
P
C
Routing Engine 600
C
A
R
D
Routing Engine 333
LED
PC card slot
Extractor clip
LED
Extractor clip
16
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
1596
PC card slot
Craft Interface
Craft Interface
The craft interface provides status and troubleshooting information at a glance and has
buttons for deactivating alarms and preparing FPCs for removal. The craft interface is located
on the front of the chassis below the FPC card cage, as shown in Figure 1. It includes the
elements shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7: Craft Interface
FPC LEDs
FAIL
OK
0
NC
C
NO
OK
FAIL
1
RED
ALARM
OK
FAIL
2
OK
3
ALARM
FAIL
OK
4
FAIL
OK
FAIL
OK
5
MENU
FAIL
6
OK
7
ROUTING ENGINE
OK
ALARM
CUTOFF
CONSOLE
FAIL
ENTER
YELLOW
ALARM
MANAGEMENT
ETHERNET
AUXILIARY
1065
NC
C
NO
FAIL
Alarm relay
contacts
Alarm LEDs
LCD
Routing Engine LEDs
Routing Engine ports
The power supply LEDs are located on the power supply
faceplate, rather than on the craft interface. For more
information, see “Power Supplies” on page 20.
For information about the elements on the craft interface, see the following sections:
„ FPC LEDs and Offline Button on page 18
„ Alarm Relay Contacts, LEDs, and Cutoff Button on page 18
„ LCD on page 19
„ Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports on page 19
Hardware Component Overview
17
Craft Interface
FPC LEDs and Offline Button
Each of the eight FPC slots in the router has two LEDs and an offline button located directly
below it on the craft interface, as shown in Figure 7. The green LED labeled OK and red LED
labeled FAIL indicate FPC status, as described in Table 5.
The offline button, labeled with the FPC slot number (for example, 4), prepares the FPC for
removal from the router when pressed. Press and hold the button for about 5 seconds, until
the FAIL LED lights.
Table 5: States for FPC LEDs
Label
OK
FAIL
Shape
Color
Green
Red
State
Description
On steadily
FPC is functioning normally.
Blinking
FPC is starting up.
On steadily
FPC has failed or is offline.
Alarm Relay Contacts, LEDs, and Cutoff Button
The area labeled ALARM at the left side of the craft interface contains two alarm LEDs and
relay contacts, and the alarm cutoff button (see Figure 7). The circular LED, labeled
RED ALARM, lights to indicate a critical condition that can result in a system shutdown. The
triangular LED, labeled YELLOW ALARM, lights to indicate a less severe condition that requires
monitoring or maintenance. Both LEDs can be lit simultaneously. The LCD on the craft
interface reports the cause of the alarm.
To the left of the LEDs are the corresponding relay contacts for connecting the router to
external alarm-reporting devices. A system condition that causes the red or yellow alarm LED
to light on the craft interface also activates the corresponding alarm relay contact. For
instructions for attaching a device to the alarm relay contacts, see “Connect to an External
Alarm-Reporting Device” on page 121.
To deactivate red and yellow alarms, press the button labeled ALARM CUTOFF, which is located
to the right of the alarm LEDs. Deactivating an alarm turns off both LEDs and deactivates the
device attached to the corresponding alarm relay contact. However, the LCD continues to
report the alarm message until you clear the condition that caused the alarm.
18
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Craft Interface
Table 6 describes the alarm LEDs and alarm cutoff button in more detail.
Table 6: Alarm LEDs and Alarm Cutoff Button
Shape
State
Description
Red
Color
On steadily
Critical alarm LED—Indicates a critical condition that
can cause the router to stop functioning. Possible
causes include component removal, failure, or
overheating.
Yellow
On steadily
Warning alarm LED—Indicates a serious but nonfatal
error condition, such as a maintenance alert or a
significant increase in component temperature.
—
—
Alarm cutoff button—Deactivates red and yellow
alarms and reset timers for system maintenance alerts.
ALARM
CUTOFF
LCD
A four-line LCD is located in the center part of the craft interface, next to six navigation
buttons (see Figure 7). The LCD operates in two modes:
„ Idle mode—Reports current system status during normal operation.
„ Alarm mode—Reports alarm conditions when the red or yellow alarm LED is lit. For a
list of alarm messages that can appear on the LCD, see “Hardware and Interface Alarm
Messages” on page 192.
Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports
The area labeled ROUTING ENGINE at the right side of the craft interface contains Routing
Engine status LEDs and three ports for connecting the Routing Engine to external devices on
which system administrators can issue JUNOS command-line interface (CLI) commands to
manage the router.
The green LED labeled OK and red LED labeled FAIL indicate Routing Engine status, as
described in Table 7.
Table 7: States for Routing Engine LEDs
Label
OK
FAIL
Shape
Color
Green
Red
State
Description
On steadily
System Control Board detects presence of the Routing
Engine.
Blinking
Routing Engine is starting up.
On steadily
Routing Engine is not operational, or System Control
Board does not detect its presence.
Hardware Component Overview
19
Power Supplies
The interface ports with the indicated label function as follows:
„ MANAGEMENT ETHERNET—Connects the Routing Engine through an Ethernet connection
to a management LAN (or any other device that plugs into an Ethernet connection) for
out-of-band management. The port uses an autosensing RJ-45 connector to support both
10- and 100-Mbps connections.
„ CONSOLE—Connects the Routing Engine to a system console through an RS-232
(EIA-232) serial cable.
„ AUXILIARY— Connects the Routing Engine to a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device
through an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable.
For information about the pinouts for the connectors, see “Cable Connectors and Pinouts” on
page 207.
Power Supplies
The router can use either AC or DC power. In either case, there are two load-sharing power
supplies that install into the bays located at the bottom rear of the chassis, as shown in
Figure 2. As viewed from the rear of the chassis, the supply on the left is referred to as supply
A and the supply on the right as supply B. The power supplies connect to the backplane,
which distributes power to router components according to their individual voltage
requirements. Each power supply has a system ground connector and an integrated fan to
cool the power assembly.
The power supplies are fully redundant. When both power supplies are operational, they
automatically share the electrical load. If one power supply stops functioning for any reason,
the remaining power supply instantly begins providing all the power the router needs for
normal functioning, and can provide full power indefinitely.
Power supplies are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable
Units (FRUs)” on page 4. Each power supply has a safety interlock lever that prevents
removal of the supply while it is on, but to avoid electrical injury, carefully follow the
instructions in “Replace an AC Power Supply” on page 136 and “Replace a DC Power Supply”
on page 141.
.
After powering off a power supply, wait at least 60 seconds
before turning it back on. After powering on a power
supply, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it off.
If the router is completely powered down when you power
on a power supply, the Routing Engine boots as the power
supply completes its startup sequence. If the Routing
Engine finishes booting and you need to power down the
router again, first issue the CLI request system halt
command.
After a power supply is powered on, it can take up to 60
seconds for status indicators—such as LEDs on the power
supply, show chassis commands, and messages on the
craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
during the first 60 seconds.
20
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Power Supplies
For information about the cables required for each type of power supply, see “Power System
Requirements and Specifications” on page 44.
See the following sections for further information about the power supplies:
„ AC Power Supply on page 21
„ DC Power Supply on page 22
„ Power Supply LEDs on page 22
AC Power Supply
An AC-powered router has two load-sharing AC power supplies, located at the bottom rear of
the chassis, as shown in Figure 2. Figure 8 shows the power supply and Table 8 lists electrical
specifications. For information about the LEDs on the power supply, see “Power Supply
LEDs” on page 22.
Figure 8: AC Power Supply
Captive
screw
Handle
Extractor/inserter
Power switch
Appliance inlet
Safety interlock lever
Status LEDs
Grounding points
Table 8: AC Power Supply Electrical Specifications
Description
Specification
Maximum power output
1500 W
Input voltage
180–264 VAC operating range
Input line frequency
50–60 Hz, autoranging
Input current rating
8A @ 208V
Output voltage
+3.3V, +5V, +2.5V, +12V, +24V
Hardware Component Overview
21
Power Supplies
DC Power Supply
A DC-powered router has two load-sharing DC power supplies, located at the bottom rear of
the chassis, as shown in Figure 2. Each power supply has an internal circuit breaker. Figure 9
shows the power supply and Table 9 lists electrical specifications. For information about the
LEDs on the power supply, see “Power Supply LEDs” on page 22.
Figure 9: DC Power Supply
Handle
Captive
screw
Extractor/inserter
Power terminals
Power switch
1038
Status LEDs
Safety interlock lever
Grounding studs
Table 9: DC Power Supply Electrical Specifications
Description
Specification
Maximum power output
1500 W
Input voltage
–40 through –75 VDC operating range
Input current rating
35A @ 48V
Output voltage
+3.3V, +5V, +2.5V, +12V, +24V
Power Supply LEDs
Table 10 describes the LEDs on both AC and DC power supplies.
Table 10: States for Power Supply LEDs
Label
OK
FAIL
22
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Color
State
Description
Green
On steadily
Power supply is functioning normally, input is occurring, outputs
are within range, temperature is within range, and fans are
operational.
Red
On steadily
Power supply has failed.
Cooling System
Cooling System
The cooling system consists of separate subsystems (sets of fans and impellers) that draw
room air into the chassis to keep its internal temperature below a maximum acceptable level.
When the temperature is below the maximum, the fans and impellers function at less than
full speed. If sensors detect that the temperature of a component has exceeded the
acceptable maximum—for example, because an impeller is removed—the speed of the
remaining impellers and fans is automatically increased to reduce the temperature. The fans
and impellers can function at the higher speed indefinitely.
For more information about the cooling system, see the following sections:
„ Cooling System Components on page 23
„ Airflow through the Chassis on page 24
Cooling System Components
The cooling system has the following components. Except as noted, they are hot-removable
and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 4.
„ Air intake vent and air filter—Provide an opening for room air to enter the router. They
are located at the bottom of the chassis front, below the craft interface, as shown in
Figure 1. The air filter prevents dust and other particles from entering the cooling
system. For replacement instructions, see “Maintain and Replace the Air Filter” on
page 154.
Do not remove the air filter for more than a minute or so
while the router is operating. The fans and impellers are
powerful enough to draw in foreign material, such as bits
of wire, through the unfiltered air intake, which could
damage router components.
„ Upper and lower impeller assemblies—Cool the Packet Forwarding Engine components
(backplane, SCB, FPCs, and PICs). The lower impeller assembly is located behind the
craft interface at the front the chassis, and the upper assembly is located above the fan
tray at the rear of the chassis. Each assembly houses two impellers for redundancy. The
assemblies are not interchangeable. For replacement instructions, see “Replace the
Lower Impeller Assembly” on page 158 and “Replace the Upper Impeller Assembly” on
page 159.
„ Fan tray—Cools the Routing Engine and backplane. The tray houses three fans for
redundancy and is located above the Routing Engine at the upper rear of the chassis (see
Figure 2). For replacement instructions, see “Maintain and Replace the Fan Tray” on
page 155.
„ Power supply integrated fan—Cools the power supply. It is not field-replaceable.
Hardware Component Overview
23
Cable Management System
Airflow through the Chassis
Figure 10 shows airflow through the chassis and the location of the cooling subsystems.
Figure 10: Side View of Air Flow through the Chassis
Exhaust for
Packet Forwarding
Engine cooling
Rear of Chassis
Fan tray
Routing
Engine
Backplane
Exhaust for Routing
Engine and backplane
cooling
Upper impellers
Packet
Forwarding
Engine
Front of Chassis
Lower impellers
Air intake for
Packet Forwarding
Engine cooling
Exhaust for
power supply
Power supply
and Fans
Air intake for
power supply cooling
1008
Air intake for
Routing Engine cooling
Cable Management System
The cable management system is a row of staggered metal hooks located at the top of the
chassis front (see Figure 1). Each hook is draped with a rounded plastic shield and the row is
shielded by a removable cover. Threading PIC cables through the hooks keeps cables in place,
reduces tangling, prevents undue stress on a cable by distributing its weight evenly, and helps
maintain the proper bend radius for optical cables.
24
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
3
JUNOS Internet Software Overview
The JUNOS Internet software is especially designed for the large production networks
typically supported by Internet Service Providers (ISPs). It incorporates Internet Protocol (IP)
routing software and software for management of interfaces, networks, and the router
chassis.
The JUNOS Internet software runs on the Routing Engine. The software consists of processes
that support Internet routing protocols, control the router’s interfaces and the router chassis
itself, and provide an interface for system management. The processes run on top of a kernel
that coordinates the communication among processes and has a direct link to the Packet
Forwarding Engine software.
Use the JUNOS Internet software to configure the routing protocols that run on the router and
the properties of router interfaces. After you have activated a software configuration, use the
JUNOS Internet software to monitor the protocol traffic passing through the router and to
troubleshoot protocol and network connectivity problems.
This chapter discusses the following topics:
„ Routing Engine Software Components on page 26
„ Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software on page 30
„ Software Monitoring Tools on page 30
„ Software Upgrades on page 30
For complete information about configuring the software, including examples, see the JUNOS
Internet software configuration guides.
JUNOS Internet Software Overview
25
Routing Engine Software Components
Routing Engine Software Components
The Routing Engine software consists of several software processes that control router
functions and a kernel that coordinates communication among the processes, as described
in the following sections:
„ Routing Protocol Process on page 26
„ Interface Process on page 29
„ SNMP and MIB II Processes on page 29
„ Management Process on page 29
„ Routing Engine Kernel on page 29
Routing Protocol Process
The JUNOS software routing protocol process controls the routing protocols that run on the
router. The routing protocol process starts all configured routing protocols and handles all
routing messages. It consolidates the routing information learned from all routing protocols
into common routing tables. From this routing information, the routing protocol process
determines the active routes to network destinations and installs these routes into the
Routing Engine’s forwarding table. Finally, the routing protocol process implements the
routing policies you specify, which determine how routing information is transferred between
the routing protocols and the routing table.
This section discusses the following topics:
„ Routing Protocols on page 26
„ Routing and Forwarding Tables on page 28
„ Routing Policy on page 28
For complete information about routing concepts, see the JUNOS Internet software
configuration guides.
Routing Protocols
The JUNOS Internet software implements full IP routing functionality, providing support for
IP Version 4 (IPv4) and IP Version 6 (IPv6). The routing protocols are fully interoperable with
existing IP routing protocols and provide the scale and control necessary for the Internet
core. The software provides support for the following routing and traffic engineering
protocols:
„ Unicast routing protocols
26
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
„
BGP—Border Gateway Protocol, Version 4, is an Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP)
that guarantees loop-free exchange of routing information between routing
domains (also called autonomous systems). BGP, in conjunction with JUNOS routing
policy, provides a system of administrative checks and balances that can be used to
implement peering and transit agreements.
„
ICMP—Internet Control Message Protocol Router Discovery is a method that hosts
can use to discover the addresses of operational routers on a subnet.
Routing Engine Software Components
„
IS-IS—Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System is an interior gateway protocol
(IGP) for IP networks that uses the shortest-path-first algorithm (SPF algorithm, also
called the Dijkstra algorithm) to determine routes.
„
OSPF—Open Shortest Path First, Version 2, is an IGP developed for IP networks by
the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). OSPF is a link-state protocol that makes
routing decisions based on the SPF algorithm.
„
RIP—Routing Information Protocol, Version 2, is an IGP for IP networks based on
the Bellman-Ford algorithm. RIP is a distance-vector protocol. The JUNOS RIP
software is compatible with RIP Version 1.
„ Multicast routing protocols
„
DVMRP—Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a dense-mode
(flood-and-prune) multicast routing protocol.
„
IGMP—Internet Group Management Protocol, Versions 1 and 2, is used to manage
membership in multicast groups.
„
MSDP—Multicast Source Discovery Protocol enables multiple PIM sparse mode
domains to be joined. A rendezvous point (RP) in a PIM sparse mode domain has a
peering relationship with an RP in another domain, thereby discovering multicast
sources from other domains.
„
PIM sparse mode and dense mode—Protocol-Independent Multicast is a multicast
routing protocol used to route traffic to multicast groups that might span wide-area
and interdomain internetworks. In PIM sparse mode, routers explicitly join and
leave multicast groups. PIM dense mode is a flood-and-prune protocol.
„
SAP/SDP—Session Announcement Protocol and Session Description Protocol
handle conference session announcements.
„ Traffic engineering protocols
„
LDP—Label Distribution Protocol provides a mechanism for distributing labels in
non-traffic-engineered applications. LDP allows routers to establish label-switched
paths (LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer routing information
directly to data-link layer switched paths. LSPs created by LDP can also traverse
LSPs created by Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP).
„
MPLS—Multiprotocol Label Switching enables you to configure LSPs through a
network either manually or dynamically. You can control how traffic traverses the
network by directing it through particular paths, rather than relying on an IGP’s
least-cost algorithm to choose a path.
„
RSVP—Resource Reservation Protocol, Version 1, provides a mechanism for
engineering network traffic patterns that is independent of the shortest path
determined by a routing protocol. RSVP itself is not a routing protocol, but is
designed to operate with current and future unicast and multicast routing protocols.
JUNOS RSVP software supports dynamic signaling for MPLS paths.
JUNOS Internet Software Overview
27
Routing Engine Software Components
Routing and Forwarding Tables
The primary function of the JUNOS routing protocol process is maintaining routing tables and
using the information in them to determine active routes to network destinations. It copies
information about the active routes into the Routing Engine’s forwarding table, which the
JUNOS kernel copies to the Packet Forwarding Engine.
By default, the routing protocol process maintains the following routing tables and uses the
information in each table to determine active routes to network destinations:
„ Unicast routing table—Stores routing information for all unicast protocols running on the
router, including BGP, IS-IS, OSPF, and RIP. You can also configure additional routes, such
as static routes, for inclusion in the routing table. The unicast routing protocols use the
routes in this table when advertising routing information to their neighbors.
In the unicast routing table, the routing protocol process designates routes with the
lowest preference values as active. By default, a route’s preference value is simply a
function of how the routing protocol process learned about the route. You can modify
the default preference value by setting routing policies and configuring other software
parameters. See “Routing Policy” on page 28.
„ Multicast routing table (cache)—Stores routing information for all multicast protocols
running on the router, including DVMRP and PIM. You can configure additional routes
for inclusion in the routing table.
In the multicast routing table, the routing protocol process uses traffic flow and other
parameters specified by the multicast routing protocol algorithms to select active routes.
„ MPLS routing table—Stores MPLS label information.
You can configure additional routing tables to meet your requirements, as described in the
JUNOS Internet Software Configuration Guide: Routing and Routing Protocols.
Routing Policy
By default, all routing protocols place their routes into the routing table. When advertising
routes, the routing protocols, by default, advertise only a limited set of routes from the
routing table. Specifically, each routing protocol exports only the active routes that were
learned by that protocol. In addition, IGPs (IS-IS, OSPF, and RIP) export the direct (interface)
routes for the interfaces on which the protocol is explicitly configured.
For each routing table, you can affect the routes that a protocol places into the table and the
routes from the table that the protocol advertises by defining one or more routing policies
and then applying them to the specific routing protocol.
Routing policies applied when the routing protocol places routes into the routing table are
called import policies because the routes are being imported into the routing table. Policies
applied when the routing protocol is advertising routes that are in the routing table are called
export policies because the routes are being exported from the routing table. In other words,
the terms import and export are used with respect to the routing table.
28
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Routing Engine Software Components
Routing policy enables you to control (filter) which routes are imported into the routing table
and which routes are exported from the routing table. Routing policy also allows you to set
the information associated with a route as it is being imported into or exported from the
routing table. Routing policies applied to imported routes control the routes used to
determine active routes, whereas policies applied to exported routes control which routes a
protocol advertises to its neighbors.
You implement routing policy by defining policies. A policy specifies the conditions to use to
match a route and the action to perform on the route when a match occurs. For example,
when a routing table imports routing information from a routing protocol, a routing policy
might modify the route’s preference, mark the route with a color to identify it for later
manipulation, or prevent the route from even being installed in a routing table. When a
routing table exports routes to a routing protocol, a policy might assign metric values, modify
the BGP community information, tag the route with additional information, or prevent the
route from being exported altogether. You also can define policies for redistributing the
routes learned from one protocol into another protocol.
Interface Process
The JUNOS interface process manages the physical interface devices and logical interfaces on
the router. It implements the JUNOS command-line interface (CLI) commands and
configuration statements that you use to specify interface properties such as location (FPC
location in the FPC card cage and PIC location on an FPC), the interface type (such as
SONET/SDH or ATM), encapsulation, and interface-specific properties. You can configure
both interfaces that are currently active and interfaces that might be installed later.
The JUNOS interface process communicates with the interface process in the Packet
Forwarding Engine through the JUNOS kernel, enabling the JUNOS Internet software to track
the status and condition of router interfaces.
SNMP and MIB II Processes
The JUNOS Internet software supports the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP),
Versions 1 and 2, which provides a mechanism for monitoring the state of the router. This
software is controlled by the JUNOS SNMP and Management Information Base (MIB) II
processes, which consist of an SNMP master agent and a MIB II agent.
Management Process
The management process starts all the other JUNOS software processes and the CLI when the
router boots. It monitors the running JUNOS processes and makes all reasonable attempts to
restart any process that terminates.
Routing Engine Kernel
The Routing Engine kernel provides the underlying infrastructure for all JUNOS software
processes. It also provides the link between the routing tables maintained by the routing
protocol process and the forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine. Additionally, it
coordinates communication with the Packet Forwarding Engine, which primarily involves
synchronizing the Packet Forwarding Engine’s forwarding table with the master forwarding
table maintained by the Routing Engine.
JUNOS Internet Software Overview
29
Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software
Tools for Accessing and Configuring the Software
The JUNOS CLI is the primary tool for accessing and controlling the JUNOS Internet software.
You use it when accessing the router from the console or through a remote network
connection. (For information about connecting a console or other management device to the
router, see “Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports” on page 19.) The CLI includes
commands for configuring router hardware, the JUNOS Internet software, and network
connectivity.
The JUNOS CLI is a straightforward command interface. You type commands on a single line
and enter the commands by pressing the Enter key. The CLI provides command help and
command completion, as well as Emacs-style keyboard sequences for moving around on a
command line and scrolling through a buffer that contains recently executed commands. For
more information about the CLI, see the JUNOS Internet Software Configuration Guide: Getting
Started.
Software Monitoring Tools
In addition to commands for configuring router hardware and software, the CLI includes
commands for monitoring and troubleshooting hardware, software, routing protocols, and
network connectivity. CLI commands display information from routing tables, information
specific to routing protocols, and information about network connectivity derived from the
ping and traceroute utilities.
You can also use the JUNOS Internet software implementation of SNMP to monitor routers.
The SNMP software consists of an SNMP master agent and a MIB II agent. It provides full
support for MIB II SNMP Version 1 traps and Version 2 notifications, SNMP Version 1 Get and
GetNext requests, and Version 2 GetBulk requests. For more information about SNMP, see the
JUNOS Internet Software Configuration Guide: Network Management.
The software also supports tracing and logging operations, which you can use to track normal
router operations, error conditions, and the packets that the router generates or forwards.
Logging operations use a syslog-like mechanism to record systemwide, high-level events such
as interfaces going up or down and user logins on the router. Tracing operations record more
detailed information about the operation of routing protocols, such as the various types of
routing protocol packets sent and received, and routing policy actions.
Software Upgrades
The router is delivered with the JUNOS Internet software preinstalled. To upgrade the
software, you use CLI commands to copy a set of software images over the network to the
router’s flash disk. The JUNOS Internet software set consists of several images provided in
individual packages or as a bundle. You normally upgrade all packages simultaneously. For
information about installing and upgrading JUNOS software, see the JUNOS Internet Software
Configuration Guide: Getting Started.
30
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
4
System Architecture Overview
The router architecture consists of two major components:
„ Packet Forwarding Engine—Performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 packet switching, route
lookups, and packet forwarding.
„ Routing Engine—Provides Layer 3 routing services and network management.
The Packet Forwarding Engine and the Routing Engine perform independently but
communicate constantly through a 100-Mbps internal link. This arrangement provides
streamlined forwarding and routing control and the ability to run Internet-scale networks at
high speeds. Figure 11 illustrates the relationship between the Packet Forwarding Engine and
the Routing Engine.
Figure 11: System Architecture
Routing Engine
Packets
in
Packet Forwarding
Engine
Packets
out
1244
100-Mbps link
For a discussion of the architectural components, see the following sections:
„ Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture on page 32
„ Routing Engine Architecture on page 33
System Architecture Overview
31
Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture
Packet Forwarding Engine Architecture
The Packet Forwarding Engine performs Layer 2 and Layer 3 packet switching. It can forward
up to 40 million packets per second for all packet sizes, which exceeds the line speed of eight
OC-48/STM-16 lines. The aggregate throughput for the router is 40 gigabits per second (Gbps)
simplex or 2.5 Gbps per FPC installed in the system. The Packet Forwarding Engine is
implemented in application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs). It uses a centralized route
lookup engine and shared memory.
Packet Forwarding Engine includes the following components (see Figure 12):
„ Physical Interface Cards (PICs)—Physically connect the router to a complete range of
fiber-optic and digital network media. A controller ASIC in each PIC performs control
functions specific to the PIC media type.
„ Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs)—House PICs and provide shared memory for
processing incoming and outgoing packets. Each FPC hosts an I/O Manager ASIC, which
divides incoming data packets into memory blocks (cells) and reassembles the cells into
data packets when they are ready for transmission.
„ Backplane—Transports packets, notifications, and other signals between the FPCs and
the SCB (as well as other system components). Hosts the Distributed Buffer Manager
ASIC, which distributes incoming data cells to the shared memory buffers on the FPCs
and notifies the FPCs of forwarding decisions for outgoing packets.
„ System Control Board (SCB)—Hosts the Internet Processor or Internet Processor II ASIC,
which makes forwarding decisions.
Figure 12: Packet Forwarding Engine Components and Data Flow
PIC
PIC
Controller
FPC
Packet
in
System Control
Board
I/O
manager
Internet
Processor
Controller
FPC
I/O
manager
Packet
out
= ASIC
Distributed Buffer
Manager
Routing Engine
32
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
1243a
Backplane
Routing Engine Architecture
Data Flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine
Use of ASICs promotes efficient movement of data packets through the system. Packets flow
through the Packet Forwarding Engine in the following sequence (see Figure 12):
1.
Packets arrive at an incoming PIC interface.
2.
The PIC passes the packets to the FPC, where the I/O Manager ASIC processes the
packet headers, divides the packets into 64-byte data cells, and passes the cells to the
backplane.
3.
The Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC on the backplane distributes the data cells
throughout the memory buffers located on and shared by all the FPCs.
4.
The Internet Processor or Internet Processor II ASIC on the SCB performs route lookups
and makes forwarding decisions.
5.
The Internet Processor or Internet Processor II ASIC notifies a second Distributed Buffer
Manager ASIC on the backplane of the routing decision.
6.
The Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC forwards the notification to the FPC that hosts the
outbound PIC.
7.
The I/O Manager ASIC on the FPC reassembles data cells in shared memory into data
packets as they are ready for transmission and passes them to the outbound PIC.
8.
The outbound PIC transmits the data packets.
Routing Engine Architecture
The Routing Engine is an Intel-based PCI platform running the JUNOS Internet software,
which Juniper Networks has developed and optimized to handle large numbers of network
interfaces and routes. The software consists of a set of system processes running in protected
memory modules on top of an independent operating system. The JUNOS kernel supports
JUNOS system processes, which handle system management processes, routing protocols,
and control functions (see Figure 13).
The Routing Engine has a dedicated 100-Mbps internal connection to the Packet Forwarding
Engine.
System Architecture Overview
33
Routing Engine Architecture
Figure 13: Routing Engine Architecture
JUNOS
System
management
processes
Routing
protocols
Control
functions
Kernel
System processes
Operating system
1164
Intel-based PCI platform
Routing Engine Functions
The Routing Engine handles all routing protocol processes, as well as the software processes
that control the router’s interfaces, the chassis components, system management, and user
access to the router. These routing and software processes run on top of a kernel that
interacts with the Packet Forwarding Engine. For more information about the processes, see
“Routing Engine Software Components” on page 26.
The Routing Engine includes the following functions and features:
„ Processing of routing protocol packets—The Routing Engine handles all packets that
concern routing protocols, freeing the Packet Forwarding Engine to handle only packets
that represent Internet traffic.
„ Software modularity—Because each software process is devoted to a different function
and uses a separate process space, the failure of one process has little or no effect on the
others.
„ In-depth Internet functionality—Each routing protocol is implemented with a complete
set of Internet features and provides full flexibility for advertising, filtering, and
modifying routes. Routing policies are set according to route parameters (for example,
prefix, prefix lengths, and Border Gateway Protocol [BGP] attributes).
„ Scalability—The JUNOS routing tables have been designed to hold all the routes in
current networks with ample capacity for expansion. Additionally, the JUNOS Internet
software can efficiently support large numbers of interfaces and virtual circuits.
„ Management interface—Different levels of system management tools are provided,
including the JUNOS command-line interface (CLI), the JUNOScript application
programming interface, the craft interface, and SNMP.
34
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Routing Engine Architecture
„ Storage and change management—Configuration files, system images, and microcode
can be held and maintained in primary and secondary storage systems, permitting local
or remote upgrades.
„ Monitoring efficiency and flexibility—The router supports functions such as alarm
handling and packet counting on every port, without degrading packet-forwarding
performance.
The Routing Engine constructs and maintains one or more routing tables. From the routing
tables, the Routing Engine derives a table of active routes, called the forwarding table, which
is then copied into the Packet Forwarding Engine. The design of the Internet Processor II
ASIC allows the forwarding table in the Packet Forwarding Engine to be updated without
interrupting forwarding performance. See Figure 14.
Figure 14: Control Packet Handling: Routing and Forwarding Table Updates
Routing protocol
process
Routing Engine
Forwarding table
updates
Routing protocol
packets from network
Forwarding table
Packet Forwarding
Engine
Packets
out
1240
Packets
in
System Architecture Overview
35
Routing Engine Architecture
36
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Part
2
Initial Installation
„ Prepare the Site on page 39
„ Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information on page 55
„ Prepare to Install the Router on page 89
„ Install the Router and Configure Software on page 97
37
38
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
5
Prepare the Site
This chapter describes how to prepare your site so that you can install a router, discussing the
following topics:
„ Rack Requirements on page 39
„ Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance on page 42
„ Site Environmental Requirements on page 43
„ Fire Safety Requirements on page 43
„ Power System Requirements and Specifications on page 44
„ Site Electrical Wiring and Cable Guidelines on page 49
„ Fiber-Optic and Network Cable Guidelines on page 49
„ Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 53
„ Site Preparation Checklist on page 54
Rack Requirements
The router must be installed in a rack. Many types of racks are acceptable, including
front-mount racks, 4-post (telco) racks, and center-mount racks, an example of which
appears in Figure 15.
The following sections describe rack requirements:
„ Rack Size and Strength on page 40
„ Spacing of Mounting Holes on page 41
„ Connection to Building Structure on page 41
Prepare the Site
39
Rack Requirements
Figure 15: Typical Center-Mount Rack
19 in. (48.3
cm)
Mounting rails
7 ft
(2.13 m)
1011
Floor bolts
Rack Size and Strength
The router is designed for installation in a rack that complies with either the following
standards:
„ A 19-in. rack as defined in Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document
number EIA-310-D) published by the Electronics Industry Association
(http://www.eia.org).
„ A 600-mm rack as defined in the four-part Equipment Engineering (EE); European
telecommunications standard for equipment practice (document numbers ETS 300 119-1
through 119-4) published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute
(http://www.etsi.org).
The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard are
usually wider than the router’s front- or center-mounting ears, which measure 19 in.
(48.3 cm) from outer edge to outer edge. Use approved wing devices to narrow the
opening between the rails as required.
40
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Rack Requirements
The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis’s external
dimensions: 35 in. (89 cm) high, 23.5 in. (60 cm) deep, and 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) wide. The
outer edges of the front- and center-mounting ears extend the width to 19 in. (48.3 cm). The
spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and
rack that are specified in “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance”
on page 42.
The router might not fit into an 800-mm-deep cabinet,
though adjusting the front-to-back position of the front
mounting rails inside the cabinet might help.
If mounting the router in a cabinet, be sure that ventilation
is sufficient to prevent overheating.
In general, a center-mount rack is preferable to a front-mount rack, because the more even
distribution of weight in the center-mount rack provides greater stability. If a front-mount
rack is used, we recommend supporting the back of the router with a shelf or other structure.
The chassis height of 35 in. (89 cm) equals 20 U, the standard rack unit defined in Cabinets,
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment (document number EIA-310-D) published by the
Electronics Industry Association. Two routers can be stacked in a rack that has at least 42 U
(73.5 in. or 1.87 m) of usable vertical space.
The rack must be strong enough to support the weight of the fully configured router, up to
about 280 lb (127 kg). If you stack two routers in one rack, it must be capable of supporting
about 560 lb (254 kg).
Spacing of Mounting Holes
The mounting holes on the rack rails must align with the mounting holes on the chassis
mounting ears. The chassis is equipped with two different sets of vertical mounting ears, one
set intended for center-mount racks and one set intended for front-mount racks. Table 11 lists
the spacing between mounting holes on these ears.
Table 11: Rack Mounting Hole Spacing
Router Mounting Rail
Hole Spacing
Front-mounting ear
3 U (5.25 in. or 13.33 cm) and 4 U (7 in. or 17.78 cm)
Center-mounting ear
3 U (5.25 in. or 13.33 cm)
Connection to Building Structure
Always secure the rack to the structure of the building. If your geographical area is subject to
earthquakes, bolt the rack to the floor. For maximum stability, also secure the rack to ceiling
brackets. For more information, see “Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings” on
page 76.
Prepare the Site
41
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance
Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware Maintenance
When planning the installation site, you need to allow sufficient clearance around the rack
(see Figure 16):
„ For the cooling system to function properly, the airflow around the chassis must be
unrestricted. Allowing at least 6 in. (15.2 cm) of clearance between each side of the
chassis and adjacent racks or equipment is recommended.
„ For service personnel to remove and install hardware components, there must be
adequate space at the front and back of the router. Allow at least 19 in. (50 cm) both in
front of and behind the rack.
Figure 16: Chassis Dimensions (Top View) and Recommended Clearances
19" clearance required
for maintenance
6" for airflow
23.5"
Front of chassis
19" clearance required
for maintenance
Rear of chassis
Front-mounting ear
42
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Center-mounting ear
6" for airflow
1012
19" 17.25"
Site Environmental Requirements
Site Environmental Requirements
Table 17 specifies the environmental conditions required for normal router operation. In
addition, the site should be as dust-free as possible. Dust can clog the air filter, reducing
cooling system efficiency. Check the air filter under the cable management system and the
covers on all cooling subsystems frequently, cleaning them as necessary. For more
information, see “Maintain and Replace Cooling System Components” on page 153.
Figure 17: Site Environment Specifications
Description
Specification
Altitude
No performance degradation to 10,000 ft. (3048 m)
Relative humidity
Normal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5% to 90%,
noncondensing
Temperature
Normal operation ensured in temperature range of 0°C (32°F) to +40°C
(104°F)
Shock
Tested to meet Bellcore Zone 4 earthquake requirements
Install the router only in restricted areas, such as dedicated
equipment rooms and equipment closets, in accordance
with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70.
For additional safety guidelines and requirements, see
“Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information” on
page 55.
Fire Safety Requirements
In the event of a fire emergency involving routers and other network equipment, the safety of
people is the primary concern. You should establish procedures for protecting people in the
event of a fire emergency, provide safety training, and properly provision fire-control
equipment and fire extinguishers.
In addition, you should establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire
emergency. Juniper Networks products should be installed in an environment suitable for
electronic equipment. We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available in the
event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment, and that all local fire, safety, and electrical
codes and ordinances be observed when installing and operating your equipment.
Fire Suppression
In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire, you should first turn power off to the
equipment at the source. Then, use a Type C fire extinguisher, which uses noncorrosive fire
retardants, to extinguish the fire. For more information about fire extinguishers, see “Fire
Suppression Equipment” on page 44.
Prepare the Site
43
Power System Requirements and Specifications
Fire Suppression Equipment
Type C fire extinguishers, which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide
(CO2) and Halotron™, are most effective for suppressing electrical fires. Type C fire
extinguishers displace the oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire. For
extinguishing fire on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling,
you should use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an
extinguisher that leave residues on equipment.
Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers (dry chemical fire
extinguishers) near Juniper Networks equipment. The primary ingredient in these fire
extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate, which is very sticky and difficult to clean. In
addition, in minute amounts of moisture, monoammonium phosphate can become highly
corrosive and corrodes most metals.
Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is
subject to premature failure and unreliable operation. The equipment is considered to be
irreparably damaged.
To keep warranties effective, do not use a dry chemical fire
extinguisher to control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks
router. If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used, the unit
is no longer eligible for coverage under a service
agreement.
We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Power System Requirements and Specifications
The router can use either AC or DC power. In either case, there are two load-sharing power
supplies located at the bottom rear of the chassis (see Figure 2). Each power supply requires
a dedicated power source.
For information about the power supplies, including electrical specifications and a
description of components, see “AC Power Supply” on page 21 and “DC Power Supply” on
page 22.
For power system guidelines, see the following sections:
„ Power Supply Load Sharing, Redundancy, and Replacement on page 45
„ Connection and Grounding Requirements on page 45
„ AC Power Cord Specifications on page 45
„ DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications on page 46
„ System Power Requirements on page 48
44
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Power System Requirements and Specifications
Power Supply Load Sharing, Redundancy, and Replacement
When two power supplies are installed, they are redundant, sharing the electrical load
equally if both supplies are operational. If one power supply stops functioning for any reason,
the remaining power supply instantly begins providing all the power the router needs for
normal functioning, and can provide full power indefinitely.
Power supplies are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable
Units (FRUs)” on page 4. For replacement instructions, see “Replace an AC Power Supply” on
page 136 and “Replace a DC Power Supply” on page 141.
Connection and Grounding Requirements
On an AC-powered router, plug each power supply into a grounded 180–264 VAC power
receptacle. The receptacle provides the grounding for the router, so no additional grounding is
necessary. The receptacle must be within about 8 ft (2.5 m) of the router and must be easily
accessible.
On a DC-powered router, connect each power supply to a separate, dedicated DC power
source. Most sites distribute DC power through a main conduit that leads to frame-mounted
DC power distribution panels, one of which might be located at the top of the rack that
houses the router. A pair of cables (one input and one return) connects each power supply to
the power distribution panel.
To meet safety and EMC requirements and to ensure proper operation, a DC-powered router
must be earth-grounded before power is connected. Each power supply has a pair of terminal
studs for connecting the router to earth ground.
For power and grounding connection instructions, see “Provide Power to the Router” on
page 122.
For both AC- and DC-powered routers, power cords and
cables must not block access to router components or
drape where people could trip on them.
AC Power Cord Specifications
Two detachable AC power cords, each 2.5 m (approximately 8 ft) long, are supplied with the
router. The appliance coupler at the female end of the cord inserts into the appliance inlet on
the faceplate of the AC power supply. The coupler is type C19 as described by International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standard 60320. The plug at the male end of the power
cord fits into the power source receptacle that is standard for your geographical location.
In North America, AC power cords must not exceed 4.5 m
(approximately 14.75 ft) in length, to comply with National
Electrical Code (NEC) Sections 400-8 (NFPA 75, 5-2.2) and
210-52, and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Section
4-010(3). The cords supplied with the router are in
compliance.
Prepare the Site
45
Power System Requirements and Specifications
Table 12 lists specifications for AC power cords and Figure 18 shows the types of plugs used
in different regions.
Table 12: AC Power Cable Specifications
Country
Electrical Specification
Plug Type
Australia
240 VAC, 50 Hz AC
SAA/3
China
220 VAC, 50 Hz AC
CH2-16P
Europe
220 or 230 VAC, 50 Hz AC
VII
Italy
230 VAC, 50 Hz AC
I/3/16
North America
208 VAC, 60 Hz AC
NEMA 6-20P
United Kingdom
240 VAC, 50 Hz AC
BS89/3
Australia
China
Europe
Italy
North America
UK
1990
Figure 18: AC Plug Types
DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications
On a DC-powered router, the power cable from each external DC power source attaches to
terminal studs on the power supply, as shown in Figure 19. There are two sets of 1/4–20 UNC
terminal studs for each power supply—the input set is labeled -48V and the return set is
labeled RTN(+). The grounding cable attaches to the 1/4–20 UNC grounding studs located at
the lower right corner of the power supply.
Figure 19: DC Power Supply Cable Connectors
Cable lug
Locking
washers
Terminal studs
Input
Return
1131
Nuts
Grounding studs
46
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Power System Requirements and Specifications
Table 13 summarizes the specifications for the cables that you must supply for connecting to
the power supply terminal studs and grounding studs.
Table 13: DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications
Cable Type
Quantity and Specification
Maximum Equal
Length
Power cables
Four 6-AWG (13.3 mm2) wire cables
None
Grounding cable
2
One 6-AWG (13.3 mm ) high-strand-count wire cable
None
For field-wiring connections, use copper conductors only.
For other electrical safety information, see “Electrical
Safety Guidelines and Warnings” on page 60.
Both the grounding studs and each pair of terminal studs on the circuit breaker box are
spaced at 0.625-in. (15.86-mm) centers. The accessory box shipped with the router includes
the cable lugs that attach to the end of the power and grounding cables (see Figure 20). The
spacing of the holes in the lug matches the spacing of the terminal grounding studs.
Before router installation begins, a licensed electrician
must attach the cable lugs to the grounding and power
cables that you supply. Cables with incorrectly attached
lugs can damage the router (for example, by causing a
short circuit).
Figure 20: DC Power Supply Terminal and Grounding Lug
2.25
End view
0.28
diameter
each hole
0.55
6 AWG conductor
0.08
0.25
0.625
0.37
All measurements in inches
1188
Crimp area
During router installation, secure the grounding cable to the grounding studs and the power
cables to the terminal studs, in that order. Secure the grounding cable lug with washers, then
with 7/16-in. nuts. Then remove the plastic protective shield that covers the power supply
terminal studs as shipped, and secure the power cable lugs to the terminal studs with locking
washers, then with nuts, as shown in Figure 19. Replace the plastic protective shield. The
nuts and washers that secure the power cables to the terminal studs are already installed on
the studs.
Prepare the Site
47
Power System Requirements and Specifications
For complete instructions, see “Connect Power to a DC-Powered Router” on page 123.
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench for the
7/16-in. nut driver or wrench needed to tighten and loosen
the nuts on the terminal studs. A tool that does not fit the
nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in. tool is not
available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
System Power Requirements
Table 14 lists the power requirements for the individual hardware components. The values in
this table are listed under typical voltage conditions. The power requirements are the same
for both the DC and AC power supplies.
Table 14: System Power Requirements
Component
Power (Watts)
Base system (all items except the FPCs and PICs, with the fans running in normal
mode
287
(approximate)
Fans at full speed (additional power consumed when all the fans are running at their
maximum)
144
(approximate)
FPC
23.7
The numbers listed in Table 14 are fairly accurate for larger, typical configurations. When the
total power consumption is calculated to be less than 600 watts, you should increase the
number by 10 percent because the efficiency of the power supply is lower when supplying
less current. The 10 percent reduction at lower power levels is an approximation. The actual
reduction in efficiency is nonlinear and depends on the particular mix of PICs.
Because of variation in components, temperature, and
supply voltage, we recommend you provision at least 35A
@ 48V DC for a DC-powered router, or 8A @ 208V AC for
an AC-powered router. This allows you to operate the
router in any configuration without upgrading the power
infrastructure.
48
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Site Electrical Wiring and Cable Guidelines
Site Electrical Wiring and Cable Guidelines
When planning the electrical wiring and cabling at your site, consider the factors discussed in
the following sections.
Distance Limitations for Signaling
Improperly installed wires can emit radio interference. In addition, the potential for damage
from lightning strikes increases if wires exceed recommended distances, or if wires pass
between buildings. The electromagnetic pulse (EMP) caused by lightning can damage
unshielded conductors and destroy electronic devices. If your site has previously experienced
such problems, you might want to consult experts in electrical surge suppression and
shielding.
Radio Frequency Interference
You can reduce or eliminate the emission of radio frequency interference (RFI) from your site
wiring by using twisted-pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors. If you
must exceed the recommended distances, use a high-quality twisted-pair cable with one
ground conductor for each data signal when applicable.
Electromagnetic Compatibility
If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), particularly
from lightning or radio transmitters, you might want to seek expert advice. Strong sources of
electromagnetic interference (EMI) can destroy the signal drivers and receivers in the router
and conduct power surges over the lines into the equipment, resulting in an electrical hazard.
It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and to
use electrical surge-suppression devices.
Fiber-Optic and Network Cable Guidelines
The router supports PICs that use various kinds of network cable, including multimode and
single-mode fiber-optic cable. For information about the type of cable used by each PIC, see
the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC Guide.
For more information about fiber-optic cable, see the following sections:
„ Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber on page 50
„ Attenuation and Dispersion on page 50
„ Power Budget Calculation on page 51
„ Power Margin Calculation on page 51
„ Attenuate to Prevent Saturation at SONET/SDH PICs on page 53
Prepare the Site
49
Fiber-Optic and Network Cable Guidelines
Multimode and Single-Mode Fiber
Multimode fiber is large enough in diameter to allow rays of light to reflect internally (bounce
off the walls of the fiber). Interfaces with multimode optics typically use LEDs as light
sources. LEDs are not coherent sources, however. They spray varying wavelengths of light
into the multimode fiber, which reflects the light at different angles. Light rays travel in jagged
lines through a multimode fiber, causing signal dispersion. When light traveling in the fiber
core radiates into the fiber cladding, higher-order mode loss (HOL) results. Together these
factors limit the transmission distance of multimode fiber compared to single-mode fiber.
Single-mode fiber is so small in diameter that rays of light can reflect internally through one
layer only. Interfaces with single-mode optics use lasers as light sources. Lasers generate a
single wavelength of light, which travels in a straight line through the single-mode fiber.
Compared with multimode fiber, single-mode fiber has higher bandwidth and can carry
signals for longer distances. It is consequently more expensive.
For information about the maximum transmission distance and supported wavelength range
for the types of single-mode and multimode fiber-optic cable used by PICs on the M40 router,
see the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC Guide. Exceeding the maximum transmission
distances can result in significant signal loss, which causes unreliable transmission.
The router uses optical lasers for SONET/SDH PIC single-mode interfaces. These optics
comply with IR-1 of Telcordia Technologies document GR-253-CORE Issue 2, December 1995
and ANSI TI.105.06.
Attenuation and Dispersion
A functional optical data link depends on modulated light reaching the receiver with enough
power to be correctly demodulated. Attenuation is the reduction in power of the light signal
as it is transmitted. Attenuation is caused by passive media components, such as cables,
cable splices, and connectors. While attenuation is significantly lower for optical fiber than
for other media, it still occurs in both multimode and single-mode transmission. An efficient
optical data link must have enough light available to overcome attenuation.
Dispersion is the spreading of the signal in time. The following two types of dispersion can
affect an optical data link:
„ Chromatic dispersion—The spreading of the signal in time resulting from the different
speeds of light rays.
„ Modal dispersion—The spreading of the signal in time resulting from the different
propagation modes in the fiber.
For multimode transmission, modal dispersion, rather than chromatic dispersion or
attenuation, usually limits the maximum bit rate and link length. For single-mode
transmission, modal dispersion is not a factor. However, at higher bit rates and over longer
distances, chromatic dispersion rather than modal dispersion limits maximum link length.
An efficient optical data link must have enough light to exceed the minimum power that the
receiver requires to operate within its specifications. In addition, the total dispersion must be
less than the limits specified for the type of link in Telcordia Technologies document
GR-253-CORE (Section 4.3) and International Telecommunications Union (ITU) document
G.957.
50
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Fiber-Optic and Network Cable Guidelines
When chromatic dispersion is at the maximum allowed, its effect can be considered as a
power penalty in the power budget. The optical power budget must allow for the sum of
component attenuation, power penalties (including those from dispersion), and a safety
margin for unexpected losses. For more information calculating the power budget, see
“Power Budget Calculation” on page 51.
Power Budget Calculation
A link’s power budget is the maximum amount of power it can transmit. When you calculate
the power budget, you use a worst-case analysis to provide a margin of error, even though all
the parts of an actual system do not operate at the worst-case levels. To calculate the
worst-case estimate of power budget (PB), you assume minimum transmitter power (PT) and
minimum receiver sensitivity (PR).
Table 15 lists equations for calculating the power budget for SONET/SDH PIC interfaces. The
values are measured in decibels (dB) and decibels referred to one milliwatt (dBm).
Table 15: Calculating Power Budget for SONET/SDH PIC Interfaces
PIC Interface
Power Budget Equation
Multimode
PB = P T – PR
PB = –15 dBm – (–28 dBm)
PB = 13 dB
OC-12 single-mode PB = PT – PR
PB = –15 dBm – (–28 dBm)
PB = 13 dB
OC-48 single-mode PB = PT – PR
PB = –5 dBm – (–18 dBm)
PB = 13 dB
Power Margin Calculation
After calculating a link’s power budget (using the equation described in “Power Budget
Calculation” on page 51), you can calculate the power margin (PM), which estimates the
amount of power available after subtracting attenuation or link loss (LL) from the power
budget (PB). A worst-case estimate of PM assumes maximum LL:
PM = PB – LL
A PM greater than zero indicates that the power budget is sufficient to operate the receiver.
Prepare the Site
51
Fiber-Optic and Network Cable Guidelines
Table 16 lists the estimated amount of loss for factors that cause link loss.
Table 16: Estimating Link Loss
Link-Loss Factor
Estimated Link-Loss Value
Higher-order mode losses
Single-mode—None
Multimode—0.5 dB
Modal and chromatic
dispersion
Single-mode—None
Multimode—None, if product of bandwidth and distance is less than 500
MHz–km
Connector
0.5 dB
Splice
0.5 dB
Fiber attenuation
Single-mode—0.5 dB/km
Multimode—1 dB/km
In the following sample calculation for a 2 km-long multimode link with a power budget (PB)
of 13 dB, the link loss (LL) is the sum of the following factors:
„ Fiber attenuation for 2 km @ 1.0 dB/km= 2 dB
„ Loss for five connectors @ 0.5 dB per connector = 5(0.5 dB) = 2.5 dB
„ Loss for two splices @ 0.5 dB per splice =2(0.5 dB) = 1 dB
„ Higher-order loss = 0.5 dB
„ Clock recovery module = 1 dB
The power margin is as follows:
PM = PB – LL
PM = 13 dB – 2 km (1.0 dB/km) – 5 (0.5 dB) – 2 (0.5 dB) – 0.5 dB [HOL] – 1 dB [CRM]
PM = 13 dB – 2 dB – 2.5 dB – 1 dB – 0.5 dB – 1 dB
PM = 6 dB
In the following sample calculation for an 8 km-long single-mode link with a power budget
(PB) of 13 dB, the link loss (LL) is the sum of fiber attenuation (8 km @ 0.5 dB/km, or 4 dB)
and loss for seven connectors @ 0.5 dB per connector, or 3.5 dB:
PM
PM
PM
PM
=
=
=
=
PB – LL
13 dB – 8 km (0.5 dB/km) – 7 (0.5 dB)
13 dB – 4 dB – 3.5 dB
5.5 dB
In both examples, the calculated power margin is greater than zero, indicating that the link
has sufficient power for transmission and does not exceed the maximum receiver input
power.
52
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications
Attenuate to Prevent Saturation at SONET/SDH PICs
SONET/SDH interfaces in the different reach classes—short reach (SR), intermediate reach
(IR), and long reach (LR)—generate different output power levels and tolerate different input
power levels. Interfaces that have a longer reach can transmit enough power to saturate the
receivers on PICs that have a shorter reach. Specifically, LR interfaces can saturate IR PICs,
and both IR and LR interfaces can saturate SR PICs. Interfaces in the same reach class can
also potentially saturate one another.
To prevent saturation, you might need to attenuate power at the PIC receiver, particularly if
you know that it has a shorter reach than the interface that is sending the signal. Determine
the amount of attenuation needed by measuring the power level at each receiver. Attenuate
the power to bring it within the allowable range; for short lengths of fiber, with fiber and
connector loss close to zero, an attenuator of 5 to 10 dB should be sufficient.
For specifications of minimum and maximum input level (receiver sensitivity and receiver
saturation) and minimum and maximum output level (average launch power) for the
SONET/SDH PICs supported on the M40 router, see the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC
Guide.
Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications
For management and service operations, you connect the Routing Engine to an external
console or management network through ports on the craft interface. You can also connect
the router to external alarm-reporting devices through the alarm relay contacts on the craft
interface. (For more information, see “Craft Interface” on page 17.)
Table 17 lists the specifications for the cables that connect to management ports and the
wires that connect to the alarm relay contacts.
Table 17: Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications
Cable
Specification
Cable/Wire
Supplied
Routing Engine
console or
auxiliary interface
RS-232 (EIA-232)
serial cable
One 6-ft (1.83-m)
6 ft (1.83 m)
length with
DB-9/DB-9 connectors
DB-9 male
Routing Engine
Ethernet interface
Category 5 cable or
equivalent suitable
for 100BaseT
operation
One 15-ft (4.92-m)
length with
RJ-45/RJ-45
connectors
328 ft (100 m)
RJ-45
autosensing
Alarm relay
contacts
28-AWG to 14-AWG
(0.09 to 2.09 mm2)
wire
No
None
—
Cable Type
Router
Maximum Length Receptacle
Prepare the Site
53
Site Preparation Checklist
Site Preparation Checklist
The checklist in Table 18 summarizes the tasks you need to perform when preparing a site
for router installation.
Table 18: Site Preparation Checklist
Item or Task
Verify that environmental factors such as
temperature and humidity do not exceed router
tolerances.
Measure distance between external power sources
and router installation site.
Select the type of rack.
Plan rack location, including required space
clearances.
Secure rack to floor and building structure.
Acquire cables and connectors.
Locate sites for connection of system grounding.
Calculate power budget and power margin.
54
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Performed By
Date
Notes
Chapter
6
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
To install and use the router safely, follow proper safety procedures. This chapter provides the
following safety and regulatory compliance information:
„ Definition of Safety Warning Levels on page 55
„ Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 57
„ Agency Approvals on page 84
„ Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 86
Definition of Safety Warning Levels
This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings:
You might find this information helpful in a particular situation, or might otherwise
overlook it.
You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or discomfort to you, or
severe damage to the router.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
55
Definition of Safety Warning Levels
This symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury. Before you
work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be
familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar. U verkeert in een situatie die
lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken. Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken, dient u
zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken risico's en dient u op de
hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen.
Varoitus Tämä varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa. Olet tilanteessa, joka voi johtaa
ruumiinvammaan. Ennen kuin työskentelet minkään laitteiston parissa, ota selvää
sähkökytkentöihin liittyvistä vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehkäisykeinoista.
Attention Ce symbole d'avertissement indique un danger. Vous vous trouvez dans une
situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels. Avant de travailler sur
un équipement, soyez conscient des dangers posés par les circuits électriques et
familiarisez-vous avec les procédures couramment utilisées pour éviter les accidents.
Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr. Sie befinden sich in einer Situation, die zu
einer Körperverletzung führen könnte. Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Gerät
beginnen, seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der
Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unfällen bewußt.
Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo. La situazione potrebbe
causare infortuni alle persone. Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura, occorre
conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard
per la prevenzione di incidenti.
Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare. Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan føre til
personskade. Før du utfører arbeid på utstyr, må du vare oppmerksom på de
faremomentene som elektriske kretser innebærer, samt gjøre deg kjent med vanlig praksis
når det gjelder å unngå ulykker.
Aviso Este símbolo de aviso indica perigo. Encontra-se numa situação que lhe poderá
causar danos físicos. Antes de começar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento,
familiarize-se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos eléctricos, e com quaisquer
práticas comuns que possam prevenir possíveis acidentes.
¡Atención! Este símbolo de aviso significa peligro. Existe riesgo para su integridad física.
Antes de manipular cualquier equipo, considerar los riesgos que entraña la corriente
eléctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estándar de prevención de accidentes.
Varning! Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara. Du befinner dig i en situation som kan
leda till personskada. Innan du utför arbete på någon utrustning måste du vara medveten
om farorna med elkretsar och känna till vanligt förfarande för att förebygga skador.
56
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
This section provides the safety guidelines and warnings for installing, operating, and
maintaining the router:
„ General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 57
„ Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 60
„ Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 71
„ Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 76
„ Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 79
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the router from damage. The list
of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working
environment, so be alert and exercise good judgement at all times.
„ Perform only the procedures explicitly described in this manual. Make sure that only
authorized service personnel perform other system services.
„ Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before, during, and after
installation.
„ Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking.
„ Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry, such as rings, bracelets, or chains, which could
become caught in the chassis.
„ Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous to
your eyes.
„ Do not perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the
equipment unsafe.
„ Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle.
„ Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms.
„ Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for
wet environments.
„ Operate the router only when it is properly grounded.
„ Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating.
„ Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts when instructions are not
provided in this manual. Such an action could cause severe electrical shock.
„ Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame. Such an
action could result in electrical shock or fire.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
57
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
„ Avoid spilling liquid onto the router chassis or onto any router component. Such an
action could cause electrical shock or damage the router.
„ Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been disconnected
from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
„ Observe the following warnings:
„
Qualified Personnel Warning on page 58
„
Restricted Access Area Warning on page 59
Qualified Personnel Warning
Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the router.
Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd
personeel uitgevoerd worden.
Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pätevä henkilökunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa tämän
laitteen.
Avertissement Tout installation ou remplacement de l'appareil doit être réalisé par du
personnel qualifié et compétent.
Achtung Gerät nur von geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder auswechseln
lassen.
Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare o
sostituire questo apparecchio.
Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig opplæring bør montere eller bytte ut dette
utstyret.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá ser instalado ou substituído apenas por pessoal
devidamente treinado e qualificado.
¡Atención! Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por
personal técnico adecuadamente preparado y capacitado.
Varning Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och kvalificerad
personal.
58
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Restricted Access Area Warning
The router is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted access area is
an area to which access can be gained only by service personnel through the use of a
special tool, lock and key, or other means of security, and which is controlled by the
authority responsible for the location.
Waarschuwing Dit toestel is bedoeld voor installatie op plaatsen met beperkte toegang.
Een plaats met beperkte toegang is een plaats waar toegang slechts door servicepersoneel
verkregen kan worden door middel van een speciaal instrument, een slot en sleutel, of een
ander veiligheidsmiddel, en welke beheerd wordt door de overheidsinstantie die
verantwoordelijk is voor de locatie.
Varoitus Tämä laite on tarkoitettu asennettavaksi paikkaan, johon pääsy on rajoitettua.
Paikka, johon pääsy on rajoitettua, tarkoittaa paikkaa, johon vain huoltohenkilöstö pääsee
jonkin erikoistyökalun, lukkoon sopivan avaimen tai jonkin muun turvalaitteen avulla ja
joka on paikasta vastuussa olevien toimivaltaisten henkilöiden valvoma.
Attention Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d'accès réservé. Ces dernières sont
des zones auxquelles seul le personnel de service peut accéder en utilisant un outil spécial,
un mécanisme de verrouillage et une clé, ou tout autre moyen de sécurité. L'accès aux
zones de sécurité est sous le contrôle de l'autorité responsable de l'emplacement.
Warnung Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt
vorgesehen. Ein Bereich mit beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zu dem nur
Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs, Schloß und Schlüssel oder anderer
Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang hat, und der von dem für die Anlage zuständigen
Gremium kontrolliert wird.
Avvertenza Questa unità deve essere installata in un'area ad accesso limitato. Un'area ad
accesso limitato è un'area accessibile solo a personale di assistenza tramite un'attrezzo
speciale, lucchetto, o altri dispositivi di sicurezza, ed è controllata dall'autorità responsabile
della zona.
Advarsel Denne enheten er laget for installasjon i områder med begrenset adgang. Et
område med begrenset adgang gir kun adgang til servicepersonale som bruker et spesielt
verktøy, lås og nøkkel, eller en annen sikkerhetsanordning, og det kontrolleres av den
autoriteten som er ansvarlig for området.
Aviso Esta unidade foi concebida para instalação em áreas de acesso restrito. Uma área de
acesso restrito é uma área à qual apenas tem acesso o pessoal de serviço autorizado, que
possua uma ferramenta, chave e fechadura especial, ou qualquer outra forma de segurança.
Esta área é controlada pela autoridade responsável pelo local.
¡Advertencia! Esta unidad ha sido diseñada para instalarse en áreas de acceso restringido.
Área de acceso restringido significa un área a la que solamente tiene acceso el personal de
servicio mediante la utilización de una herramienta especial, cerradura con llave, o algún
otro medio de seguridad, y que está bajo el control de la autoridad responsable del local.
Varning! Denna enhet är avsedd för installation i områden med begränsat tillträde. Ett
område med begränsat tillträde får endast tillträdas av servicepersonal med ett speciellt
verktyg, lås och nyckel, eller annan säkerhetsanordning, och kontrolleras av den auktoritet
som ansvarar för området.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
59
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings
When working on equipment powered by electricity, follow the guidelines described in the
following sections:
„ General Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 60
„ AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 61
„ DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 61
„ Copper Conductors Warning on page 63
„ DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 64
„ DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 65
„ DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 66
„ DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 67
„ Grounded Equipment Warning on page 68
„ In Case of Electrical Accident on page 68
„ Backplane Energy Hazard Warning on page 68
„ Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 69
„ Power Disconnection Warning on page 70
„ TN and IT Power Warning on page 71
General Electrical Safety Guidelines
„ Install the router in compliance with the following local, national, or international
electrical codes:
„
United States—National Fire Protection Association (NFPA70), United States
National Electrical Code.
„
Canada—Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, CSA C22.1.
„
Other countries—International Electromechanical Commission (IEC) 60364, Part 1
through Part 7.
„
Evaluated to the TN and IT power systems.
„ Locate the emergency power-off switch for the room in which you are working so that if
an electrical accident occurs, you can quickly turn off the power.
„ Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your
workspace.
„ Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit before
starting to work.
60
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
„ Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area, such as moist floors, ungrounded
power extension cords, and missing safety grounds.
„ Operate the router within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions.
„ For the router and peripheral equipment to function safely and correctly, use the cables
and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment, and make certain they
are in good condition.
Many router components can be removed and replaced without powering down or
disconnecting power to the router, as detailed in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 4.
Never install equipment if it appears damaged.
AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to AC-powered routers:
„ AC-powered routers are shipped with a three-wire electrical cord with a grounding-type
plug that fits only a grounding-type power outlet. Do not circumvent this safety feature.
Equipment grounding should comply with local and national electrical codes.
„ You must provide an external circuit breaker rated minimum 20 A, 250 VAC in the
building installation.
„ The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device. The socket outlet must be near
the router and be easily accessible.
„ The cores in the mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:
„
Green and yellow—Earth
„
Blue—Neutral
„
Brown—Live
„ When a router is equipped with two AC power supplies, both power cords (one for each
power supply) must be unplugged to completely disconnect power to the router.
DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines
The following electrical safety guidelines apply to DC-powered routers:
„ DC-powered routers are equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power
requirements of a maximally configured router. To supply sufficient power, terminate
the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of supplying at least 45 A @ 48 VDC.
The 48 VDC facility DC source should be equipped with a circuit breaker rated at 45 A
minimum. Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring. Be
sure to connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office (earth) ground. A closed loop
ring is recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud.
„ Run two wires from the circuit breaker box to a source of 48 VDC. Use appropriate
gauge wire to handle up to 45 A.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
61
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
„ You must connect only to a DC power source for which the output complies with the
safety extra low-voltage (SELV) requirements of UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No. 950-95, EN
60950, and IEC 60950 to a DC-input terminal block.
„ A DC-powered router that is equipped with a DC terminal block is intended only for
installation in a restricted access location. In the United States, a restricted access area is
one in accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and 110-18 of the National Electrical
Code ANSI/NFPA 70.
Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building
circuit breaker. This breaker should protect against excess
currents, short circuits, and earth faults in accordance with
NEC ANSI/NFPA70.
„ Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct. Under certain conditions,
connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage the
equipment.
„ For personal safety, connect the green and yellow wire to safety (earth) ground at both
the router and the supply side of the DC wiring.
„ The marked input voltage of –48 VDC for DC-powered routers is the nominal voltage
associated with the battery circuit, and any higher voltages are only to be associated
with float voltages for the charging function.
„ Because the router is a positive ground system, you must connect the positive lead to the
terminal labeled RTN(+), the negative lead to the terminal labeled –48V, and the earth
ground to the grounding studs on each power supply. Use a hexagonal-head external
drive socket wrench, with a minimum of 150 lb-in. (16 Nm) tightening torque, to
connect the leads to the terminals.
If using a fixed-size nut driver or wrench to tighten and
loosen the nuts, use only a 7/16-in. tool. Do not substitute
a metric tool, because a tool that does not fit the nuts
exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in. tool is not available,
use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
62
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Copper Conductors Warning
Use copper conductors only.
Waarschuwing Gebruik alleen koperen geleiders.
Varoitus Käytä vain kuparijohtimia.
Attention Utilisez uniquement des conducteurs en cuivre.
Warnung Verwenden Sie ausschließlich Kupferleiter.
Avvertenza Usate unicamente dei conduttori di rame.
Advarsel Bruk bare kobberledninger.
Aviso Utilize apenas fios condutores de cobre.
¡Advertencia! Emplee sólo conductores de cobre.
Varning! Använd endast ledare av koppar.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
63
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
DC Power Disconnection Warning
Before performing any of the following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the
DC circuit. To ensure that all power is off, locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that
services the DC circuit, switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position, and tape the switch
handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert, dient u te
controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitgeschakeld is. Om u ervan te
verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld, kiest u op het schakelbord de
stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient, draait de stroomverbreker naar de UIT
positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT
positie vast.
Varoitus Varmista, että tasavirtapiirissä ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden
suorittamista. Varmistaaksesi, että virta on KATKAISTU täysin, paikanna tasavirrasta
huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin, käännä suojakytkin KATKAISTU-asentoon
ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin, että se pysyy KATKAISTU-asennossa.
Attention Avant de pratiquer l'une quelconque des procédures ci-dessous, vérifier que le
circuit en courant continu n'est plus sous tension. Pour en être sûr, localiser le disjoncteur
situé sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu, placer le disjoncteur en
position fermée (OFF) et, à l'aide d'un ruban adhésif, bloquer la poignée du disjoncteur en
position OFF.
Warnung Vor Ausführung der folgenden Vorgänge ist sicherzustellen, daß die
Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erhält. Um sicherzustellen, daß sämtlicher Strom
abgestellt ist, machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher für die Gleichstromschaltung
ausfindig, stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS, und kleben Sie den Schaltergriff des
Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS-Stellung fest.
Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti, verificare che il
circuito CC non sia alimentato. Per verificare che tutta l'alimentazione sia scollegata (OFF),
individuare l'interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC,
mettere l'interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione.
Advarsel Før noen av disse prosedyrene utføres, kontroller at strømmen er frakoblet
likestrømkretsen. Sørg for at all strøm er slått AV. Dette gjøres ved å lokalisere
strømbryteren på brytertavlen som betjener likestrømkretsen, slå strømbryteren AV og
teipe bryterhåndtaket på strømbryteren i AV-stilling.
Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos, certifique-se que desligou a
fonte de alimentação de energia do circuito de corrente contínua. Para se assegurar que
toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA, localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de
corrente contínua e coloque-o na posição OFF (Desligado), segurando nessa posição a
manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora.
¡Advertencia! Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos, comprobar que la alimentación
del circuito de corriente continua (CC) esté cortada (OFF). Para asegurarse de que toda la
alimentación esté cortada (OFF), localizar el interruptor automático en el panel que
alimenta al circuito de corriente continua, cambiar el interruptor automático a la posición
de Apagado (OFF), y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor automático en posición de
Apagado (OFF).
Varning! Innan du utför någon av följande procedurer måste du kontrollera att
strömförsörjningen till likströmskretsen är bruten. Kontrollera att all strömförsörjning är
BRUTEN genom att slå AV det överspänningsskydd som skyddar likströmskretsen och tejpa
fast överspänningsskyddets omkopplare i FRÅN-läget.
64
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning
An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded
branch circuit supply conductors, but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes, is installed
as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit. The grounding conductor is a separately
derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set.
For further information, see “DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications” on page 46.
When installing the router, the ground connection must always be made first and
disconnected last.
Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste
worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt.
Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdistäminen aina tehtävä ensiksi ja
maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi.
Attention Lors de l'installation de l'appareil, la mise à la terre doit toujours être connectée
en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
Warnung Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt
und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell'unità, eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento a
massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo.
Advarsel Når enheten installeres, må jordledningen alltid tilkobles først og frakobles sist.
Aviso Ao instalar a unidade, a ligação à terra deverá ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada, e a
última a ser desligada.
¡Advertencia! Al instalar el equipo, conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la última.
Varning! Vid installation av enheten måste jordledningen alltid anslutas först och kopplas
bort sist.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
65
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning
Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs. When connecting power, the proper
wiring sequence is ground to ground, +RTN to +RTN, then -48 V to -48 V. When
disconnecting power, the proper wiring sequence is -48 V to -48 V, +RTN to +RTN, then
ground to ground. Note that the ground wire should always be connected first and
disconnected last.
Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde, +RTN naar
+RTN, en –48 V naar – 48 V. De juiste bedradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en –48 V naar –
48 V, +RTN naar +RTN, aarde naar aarde.
Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon, +RTN varten
+RTN, –48 V varten – 48 V. Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on –48 V varten – 48 V,
+RTN varten +RTN, maajohto maajohtoon.
Attention Câblez l'approvisionnement d'alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets
appropriés à l'extrémité de câblage. En reliant la puissance, l'ordre approprié de câblage est
rectifié pour rectifier, +RTN à +RTN, puis -48 V à -48 V. En débranchant la puissance,
l'ordre approprié de câblage est -48 V à -48 V, +RTN à +RTN, a alors rectifié pour rectifier.
Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour la dernière
fois. Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours être relié d'abord et débranché pour la
dernière fois.
Warnung Verdrahten Sie die Gleichstrom-Versorgung mit den passenden Ansätzen am
Verdrahtung Ende. Wenn man Energie anschließt, wird die korrekte Verdrahtung.
Reihenfolge gerieben, um, +RTN zu +RTN, dann -48 V bis -48 V zu reiben. Wenn sie
Energie trennt, ist die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge -48 V bis -48 V,+RTN zu +RTN,
rieb dann, um zu reiben. Beachten Sie, daß der Erdungsdraht immer zuerst angeschlossen
werden und zuletzt getrennt werden sollte.
Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC. Cablare l'alimentatore CC usando i
connettori adatti all'estremità del cablaggio, come illustrato. La corretta sequenza di
cablaggio è da massa a massa, da positivo a positivo (da linea ad L) e da negativo a negativo
(da neutro a N). Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre venire collegato per primo
e scollegato per ultimo.
Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord, +RTN til +RTN, –48 V til – 48
V. Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er –48 V til – 48 V, +RTN til +RTN, jord til jord.
Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en el
extremo del cableado. Al conectar potencia, la secuencia apropiada del cableado se muele
para moler, +RTN a +RTN, entonces -48 V a -48 V. Al desconectar potencia, la secuencia
apropiada del cableado es -48 V a -48 V, +RTN a +RTN, entonces molió para moler.
Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por
último. Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar
por último.
¡Advertencia! Wire a fonte de alimentação de DC Usando os talões apropriados na
extremidade da fiação. Ao conectar a potência, a seqüência apropriada da fiação é moída
para moer, +RTN a +RTN, então -48 V a -48 V. Ao desconectar a potência, a seqüência
apropriada da fiação é -48 V a -48 V, +RTN a +RTN, moeu então para moer. Anote que o
fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último. Anote
que o fio à terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por último.
Varning! Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord, +RTN till +RTN, –48 V till – 48 V.
Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar –48 V till – 48 V, +RTN till +RTN, jord till jord.
66
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning
When stranded wiring is required, use approved wiring terminations, such as closed-loop or
spade-type with upturned lugs. These terminations should be the appropriate size for the
wires and should clamp both the insulation and conductor.
Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is, dient u bedrading te gebruiken die
voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten, zoals het gesloten-lus type of het
grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen. Deze aansluitpunten dienen
de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te
klemmen.
Varoitus Jos säikeellinen johdin on tarpeen, käytä hyväksyttyä johdinliitäntää, esimerkiksi
suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liitäntää, jossa on ylöspäin käännetyt kiinnityskorvat.
Tällaisten liitäntöjen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen
sekä eristeen että johdinosan.
Attention Quand des fils torsadés sont nécessaires, utiliser des douilles terminales
homologuées telles que celles à circuit fermé ou du type à plage ouverte avec cosses
rebroussées. Ces douilles terminales doivent être de la taille qui convient aux fils et doivent
être refermées sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur.
Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist, sind zugelassene
Verdrahtungsabschlüsse, z.B. für einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelförmig, mit
nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden. Diese Abschlüsse sollten die
angemessene Größe für die Drähte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter
festklemmen.
Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce, usare connettori omologati, come quelli a
occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l'alto. I connettori devono avere la misura
adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l'isolante che il conduttore.
Advarsel Hvis det er nødvendig med flertrådede ledninger, brukes godkjente
ledningsavslutninger, som for eksempel lukket sløyfe eller spadetype med oppoverbøyde
kabelsko. Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig størrelse i forhold til ledningene, og skal
klemme sammen både isolasjonen og lederen.
Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalação eléctrica de cabo torcido, use
terminações de cabo aprovadas, tais como, terminações de cabo em circuito fechado e
planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima. Estas terminações de cabo deverão ser
do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos, e deverão prender simultaneamente o
isolamento e o fio condutor.
¡Advertencia! Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado, utilizar terminales para cables
homologados, tales como las de tipo "bucle cerrado" o "espada", con las lengüetas de
conexión vueltas hacia arriba. Estos terminales deberán ser del tamaño apropiado para los
cables que se utilicen, y tendrán que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor.
Varning! När flertrådiga ledningar krävs måste godkända ledningskontakter användas,
t.ex. kabelsko av sluten eller öppen typ med uppåtvänd tapp. Storleken på dessa kontakter
måste vara avpassad till ledningarna och måste kunna hålla både isoleringen och ledaren
fastklämda.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
67
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Grounded Equipment Warning
The router is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the router is connected to earth ground
during normal use.
Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host-computer
tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden.
Varoitus Tämä laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi. Varmista, että isäntälaite on
yhdistetty maahan normaalikäytön aikana.
Attention Cet équipement doit être relié à la terre. S'assurer que l'appareil hôte est relié à
la terre lors de l'utilisation normale.
Warnung Dieses Gerät muß geerdet werden. Stellen Sie sicher, daß das Host-Gerät
während des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist.
Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa. Accertarsi che il
dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo.
Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes. Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt
bruk.
Aviso Este equipamento deverá estar ligado à terra. Certifique-se que o host se encontra
ligado à terra durante a sua utilização normal.
¡Advertencia! Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra. Asegurarse de que el equipo principal
esté conectado a tierra durante el uso normal.
Varning! Denna utrustning är avsedd att jordas. Se till att värdenheten är jordad vid
normal användning.
In Case of Electrical Accident
If an electrical accident results in an injury, take the following actions in this order:
1.
Use caution. Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further
injury.
2.
Disconnect power from the router.
3.
If possible, send another person to get medical aid. Otherwise, assess the condition of
the victim, then call for help.
Backplane Energy Hazard Warning
High levels of electrical energy are distributed across the router backplane. Be careful not to
touch the backplane connectors, or any component connected to the backplane, with any
metallic object while servicing components installed in the router.
68
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning
The router has more than one power supply connection. All connections must be removed
completely to remove power from the unit completely.
Waarschuwing Deze eenheid heeft meer dan één stroomtoevoerverbinding; alle
verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid volledig
te verwijderen.
Varoitus Tässä laitteessa on useampia virtalähdekytkentöjä. Kaikki kytkennät on
irrotettava kokonaan, jotta virta poistettaisiin täysin laitteesta.
Attention Cette unité est équipée de plusieurs raccordements d'alimentation. Pour
supprimer tout courant électrique de l'unité, tous les cordons d'alimentation doivent être
débranchés.
Warnung Diese Einheit verfügt über mehr als einen Stromanschluß; um Strom gänzlich
von der Einheit fernzuhalten, müssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein.
Avvertenza Questa unità ha più di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico; tutte le
connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l'elettricità dall'unità.
Advarsel Denne enheten har mer enn én strømtilkobling. Alle tilkoblinger må kobles helt
fra for å eliminere strøm fra enheten.
Aviso Este dispositivo possui mais do que uma conexão de fonte de alimentação de
energia; para poder remover a fonte de alimentação de energia, deverão ser desconectadas
todas as conexões existentes.
¡Advertencia! Esta unidad tiene más de una conexión de suministros de alimentación;
para eliminar la alimentación por completo, deben desconectarse completamente todas las
conexiones.
Varning! Denna enhet har mer än en strömförsörjningsanslutning; alla anslutningar
måste vara helt avlägsnade innan strömtillförseln till enheten är fullständigt bruten.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
69
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Power Disconnection Warning
Before working on the router or near power supplies, unplug the power cord from an AC
router; switch off the power at the circuit breaker on a DC router.
Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt, dient u
bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen; voor
gelijkstroom toestellen dient u de stroom uit te schakelen bij de stroomverbreker.
Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ja katkaise tasavirtalaitteiden virta
suojakytkimellä, ennen kuin teet mitään asennuspohjalle tai työskentelet virtalähteiden
läheisyydessä.
Attention Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation électrique,
débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant alternatif; couper l'alimentation
des unités en courant continu au niveau du disjoncteur.
Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nähe von Netzgeräten arbeiten, ziehen
Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw. schalten Sie bei Gleichstromeinheiten
den Strom am Unterbrecher ab.
Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori, scollegare il cavo di
alimentazione sulle unità CA; scollegare l'alimentazione all'interruttore automatico sulle
unità CC.
Advarsel Før det utføres arbeid på kabinettet eller det arbeides i nærheten av
strømforsyningsenheter, skal strømledningen trekkes ut p vekselstrømsenheter og
strømmen kobles fra ved strømbryteren på likestrømsenheter.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis, ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de
fornecimento de energia, desligue o cabo de alimentação nas unidades de corrente
alternada; desligue a corrente no disjuntor nas unidades de corrente contínua.
¡Advertencia! Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de
alimentación, desenchufar el cable de alimentación en los equipos de corriente alterna
(CA); cortar la alimentación desde el interruptor automático en los equipos de corriente
continua (CC).
Varning! Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nära strömförsörjningsenheter skall du för
växelströmsenheter dra ur nätsladden och för likströmsenheter bryta strömmen vid
överspänningsskyddet.
70
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
TN and IT Power Warning
The router is designed to work with TN, IT power systems.
Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN, IT
energiesystemen.
Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN-, IT-sähkövoimajärjestelmien yhteydessä.
Attention Ce dispositif a été conçu pour fonctionner avec des systèmes d'alimentation
TN.
Warnung Das Gerät ist für die Verwendung mit TN-, IT-Stromsystemen ausgelegt.
Avvertenza Il dispositivo è stato progettato per l'uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN, IT.
Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN-, IT-strømsystemer.
Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN, IT.
¡Advertencia! El equipo está diseñado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentación tipo TN,
IT.
Varning! Enheten är konstruerad för användning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av TN-,
IT-typ.
Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Observe the following guidelines and warnings before and during router installation:
„ Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 72
„ Installation Instructions Warning on page 72
„ Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 73
„ Ramp Warning on page 76
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
71
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Chassis Lifting Guidelines
A fully configured router weighs about 280 lb (127 kg). Observe the following guidelines for
lifting and moving the router:
„ Before moving the router, read the guidelines in “Prepare the Site” on page 39 to verify
that the intended site meets the specified power, environmental, and clearance
requirements.
„ Do not attempt to lift a fully configured router by yourself. Using a mechanical lift to
maneuver the router into a rack is recommended. If a lift cannot be used, a minimum of
three people must lift the router, and you must remove components from the chassis
before lifting (as described in “Remove Components from the Chassis” on page 100).
„ Before lifting or moving the router, disconnect all external cables.
„ As when lifting any heavy object, lift most of the weight with your legs rather than your
back. Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting as you
lift. Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid.
At least three people are required to lift the chassis. Before lifting the chassis, remove
components and attach the installation lifting handle, as described in “Remove
Components from the Chassis” on page 100 and “Install the Chassis into the Rack” on
page 109. To prevent injury, keep your back straight and lift with your legs, not your back.
Do not use the handles on the power supplies as hand holds for lifting the chassis.
Installation Instructions Warning
Read the installation instructions before you connect the router to a power source.
Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie-aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de
voeding verbindt.
Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen järjestelmän yhdistämistä virtalähteeseen.
Attention Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les
directives d'installation.
Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an die
Stromquelle anschließen.
Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema
all'alimentatore.
Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene før systemet kobles til strømkilden.
Aviso Leia as instruções de instalação antes de ligar o sistema à sua fonte de energia.
¡Atención! Ver las instrucciones de instalación antes de conectar el sistema a la red de
alimentación.
Varning! Läs installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess
strömförsörjningsenhet.
72
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Rack-Mounting Requirements and Warnings
Ensure that the equipment rack into which the router is installed is evenly and securely
supported, to avoid the hazardous condition that could result from uneven mechanical
loading.
To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the router in a rack, take the following
precautions to ensure that the system remains stable. The following directives help
maintain your safety:
The router must be installed into a rack that is secured to the building structure.
The router should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack.
When mounting the router in a partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom to the top
with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before mounting or
servicing the router in the rack.
Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek
monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft, moet u speciale voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen
om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft. De onderstaande richtlijnen worden
verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verzekeren:
De Juniper Networks router moet in een stellage worden geïnstalleerd die aan een bouwsel
is verankerd.
Dit toestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige in het
rek is.
Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert, dient u het rek van onderen
naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek.
Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen, dient u de stabilisatoren te
monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft.
Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessä, on
noudatettava erityisiä varotoimia järjestelmän vakavuuden säilyttämiseksi, jotta vältytään
loukkaantumiselta. Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita:
Juniper Networks router on asennettava telineeseen, joka on kiinnitetty rakennukseen.
Jos telineessä ei ole muita laitteita, aseta laite telineen alaosaan.
Jos laite asetetaan osaksi täytettyyn telineeseen, aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta
kaikkein raskaimmalla esineellä ja siirry sitten sen yläosaan.
Jos telinettä varten on vakaimet, asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen tai sen
huoltamista siinä.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
73
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Attention Pour éviter toute blessure corporelle pendant les opérations de montage ou de
réparation de cette unité en casier, il convient de prendre des précautions spéciales afin de
maintenir la stabilité du système. Les directives ci-dessous sont destinées à assurer la
protection du personnel :
Le rack sur lequel est monté le Juniper Networks router doit être fixé à la structure du
bâtiment.
Si cette unité constitue la seule unité montée en casier, elle doit être placée dans le bas.
Si cette unité est montée dans un casier partiellement rempli, charger le casier de bas en
haut en plaçant l'élément le plus lourd dans le bas.
Si le casier est équipé de dispositifs stabilisateurs, installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter
ou de réparer l'unité en casier.
Warnung Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser
Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um sicherzustellen,
daß das System stabil bleibt. Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewährleistung Ihrer
Sicherheit dienen:
Der Juniper Networks router muß in einem Gestell installiert werden, das in der
Gebäudestruktur verankert ist.
Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist, sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden.
Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gefüllten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten
nach oben zu laden, wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anzubringen ist.
Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubehör geliefert, sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu
installieren, bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten.
Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa
unità in un supporto, occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema
rimanga stabile. Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza personale:
Il Juniper Networks router deve essere installato in un telaio, il quale deve essere fissato alla
struttura dell'edificio.
Questa unità deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto, se si tratta dell'unica unità da
montare nel supporto.
Quando questa unità viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno, caricare il supporto
dal basso all'alto, con il componente più pesante sistemato sul fondo del supporto.
Se il supporto è dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti, installare tali dispositivi prima di montare
o di procedere alla manutenzione dell'unità nel supporto.
74
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Advarsel Unngå fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid på denne enheten
når den befinner seg i et kabinett. Vær nøye med at systemet er stabilt. Følgende
retningslinjer er gitt for å verne om sikkerheten:
Juniper Networks router må installeres i et stativ som er forankret til bygningsstrukturen.
Denne enheten bør monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i
kabinettet.
Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt, skal kabinettet lastes fra
bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet.
Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr, skal stabilisatorene installeres før
montering eller utføring av reparasjonsarbeid på enheten i kabinettet.
Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa
estante, deverá tomar precauções especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui um
suporte estável. As seguintes directrizes ajudá-lo-ão a efectuar o seu trabalho com
segurança:
O Juniper Networks router deverá ser instalado numa prateleira fixa à estrutura do edificio.
Esta unidade deverá ser montada na parte inferior da estante, caso seja esta a única
unidade a ser montada.
Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada, coloque os itens mais
pesados na parte inferior da estante, arrumando-os de baixo para cima.
Se a estante possuir um dispositivo de estabilização, instale-o antes de montar ou reparar a
unidade.
¡Advertencia! Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor, o
posteriormente durante su mantenimiento, se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el
sistema quede bien estable. Para garantizar su seguridad, proceda según las siguientes
instrucciones:
El Juniper Networks router debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del edificio.
Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor, cuando sea la única unidad en el mismo.
Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado, comenzar la
instalación desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo más pesado en la
parte inferior.
Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores, instalar éstos antes de montar o
proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
75
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Varning! För att undvika kroppsskada när du installerar eller utför underhållsarbete på
denna enhet på en ställning måste du vidta särskilda försiktighetsåtgärder för att försäkra
dig om att systemet står stadigt. Följande riktlinjer ges för att trygga din säkerhet:
Juniper Networks router måste installeras i en ställning som är förankrad i byggnadens
struktur.
Om denna enhet är den enda enheten på ställningen skall den installeras längst ned på
ställningen.
Om denna enhet installeras på en delvis fylld ställning skall ställningen fyllas nedifrån och
upp, med de tyngsta enheterna längst ned på ställningen.
Om ställningen är försedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan enheten
installeras eller underhålls på ställningen.
Ramp Warning
When installing the router, do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10 degrees.
Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden.
Varoitus Älä käytä sellaista kaltevaa pintaa, jonka kaltevuus ylittää 10 astetta.
Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l'inclinaison est supérieure à 10 degrés.
Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden.
Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi.
Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader.
Aviso Não utilize uma rampa com uma inclinação superior a 10 graus.
¡Advertencia! No usar una rampa inclinada más de 10 grados.
Varning! Använd inte ramp med en lutning på mer än 10 grader.
Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Single-mode Physical Interface Cards (PICs) are equipped with laser transmitters, which are
considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, and are
evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per EN 60825 requirements.
Observe the following guidelines and warnings:
„ General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 77
„ Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 77
„ Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 78
76
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
„ Laser Beam Warning on page 78
„ Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning on page 79
General Laser Safety Guidelines
When working around PICs, observe the following safety guidelines to prevent eye injury:
„ Do not look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources.
„ Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments.
„ Avoid direct exposure to the beam.
Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation. The lens in the human
eye focuses all the laser power on the retina, so even a low-power laser could permanently
damage the eye if it is focused directly on the laser source.
Class 1 Laser Product Warning
Class 1 laser product.
Waarschuwing Klasse-1 laser produkt.
Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote.
Attention Produit laser de classe I.
Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1.
Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1.
Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1.
Aviso Produto laser de classe 1.
¡Advertencia! Producto láser Clase I.
Varning! Laserprodukt av klass 1.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
77
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Class 1 LED Product Warning
Class 1 LED product.
Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED-product.
Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote.
Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I.
Warnung Class 1 LED-Produktwarnung.
Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1.
Advarsel LED-produkt i klasse 1.
Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED.
¡Advertencia! Aviso sobre producto LED de Clase 1.
Varning! Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1.
Laser Beam Warning
Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments.
Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische
instrumenten.
Varoitus Älä katso säteeseen äläkä tarkastele sitä suoraan optisen laitteen avulla.
Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux, ni l'observer directement à l'aide
d'instruments optiques.
Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Geräten
prüfen.
Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi né usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo
direttamente.
Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter.
Aviso Não olhe fixamente para o raio, nem olhe para ele directamente com instrumentos
ópticos.
¡Advertencia! No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos
ópticos.
Varning! Rikta inte blicken in mot strålen och titta inte direkt på den genom optiska
instrument.
78
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Radiation From Open Port Apertures Warning
Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fiber
cable is connected, avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into open apertures.
Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan
komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is, dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken in
open openingen vermeden te worden.
Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua näkymätöntä säteilyä, kun kuitukaapelia ei
ole kytkettynä, vältä säteilylle altistumista äläkä katso avoimiin aukkoihin.
Attention Des radiations invisibles à l'il nu pouvant traverser l'ouverture du port
lorsqu'aucun câble en fibre optique n'y est connecté, il est recommandé de ne pas regarder
fixement l'intérieur de ces ouvertures.
Warnung Aus der Port-Öffnung können unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren, wenn kein
Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist. Vermeiden Sie es, sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen, und
starren Sie nicht in die Öffnungen!
Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti, radiazioni invisibili possono essere
emesse attraverso l'apertura della porta. Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate
direttamente nelle aperture.
Advarsel Unngå utsettelse for stråling, og stirr ikke inn i åpninger som er åpne, fordi
usynlig stråling kan emiteres fra portens åpning når det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberkabel.
Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emissão de radiação invisível através do orifício da via de
acesso, quando esta não tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado, deverá evitar a exposição à
radiação e não deverá olhar fixamente para orifícios que se encontrarem a descoberto.
¡Advertencia! Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiación invisible cuando
no existe un cable de fibra conectado, evite mirar directamente a las aperturas para no
exponerse a la radiación.
Varning! Osynlig strålning kan avges från en portöppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och du
bör därför undvika att bli utsatt för strålning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade öppningar.
Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings
As you maintain the router, observe the following guidelines and warnings:
„ Battery Handling Warning on page 80
„ Jewelry Removal Warning on page 81
„ Lightning Activity Warning on page 82
„ Operating Temperature Warning on page 83
„ Product Disposal Warning on page 84
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
79
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Battery Handling Warning
Replacing the battery incorrectly might result in an explosion. Replace the battery only with
the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt. Vervang
de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant aanbevolen is.
Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden.
Varoitus Räjähdyksen vaara, jos akku on vaihdettu väärään akkuun. Käytä vaihtamiseen
ainoastaan saman- tai vastaavantyyppistä akkua, joka on valmistajan suosittelema. Hävitä
käytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan.
Attention Danger d'explosion si la pile n'est pas remplacée correctement. Ne la
remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou équivalent, recommandée par le
fabricant. Jeter les piles usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Ersetzen Sie die
Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp. Entsorgen
Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers.
Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non è installata correttamente. Sostituire
solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente, consigliata dal produttore. Eliminare le batterie
usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore.
Advarsel Det kan være fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes på feil måte. Skift kun med
samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten. Kasser brukte batterier i
henhold til produsentens instruksjoner.
Aviso Existe perigo de explosão se a bateria for substituída incorrectamente. Substitua a
bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo fabricante.
Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instruções do fabricante.
¡Advertencia! Existe peligro de explosión si la batería se reemplaza de manera incorrecta.
Reemplazar la batería exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente recomendado por
el fabricante. Desechar las baterías gastadas según las instrucciones del fabricante.
Varning! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Ersätt endast batteriet med samma
batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande. Följ tillverkarens
anvisningar vid kassering av använda batterier.
80
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Jewelry Removal Warning
Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove jewelry, including
rings, necklaces, and watches. Metal objects heat up when connected to power and ground
and can cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the terminals.
Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is
verbonden, sieraden (inclusief ringen, kettingen en horloges) verwijderen. Metalen
voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden, en kunnen
ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen
lassen.
Varoitus Ennen kuin työskentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa, ota
pois kaikki korut (sormukset, kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien). Metalliesineet
kuumenevat, kun ne ovat yhteydessä sähkövirran ja maan kanssa, ja ne voivat aiheuttaa
vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liitäntänapoihin.
Attention Avant d'accéder à cet équipement connecté aux lignes électriques, ôter tout
bijou (anneaux, colliers et montres compris). Lorsqu'ils sont branchés à l'alimentation et
reliés à la terre, les objets métalliques chauffent, ce qui peut provoquer des blessures graves
ou souder l'objet métallique aux bornes.
Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Geräten, die an das Netz angeschlossen sind, jeglichen
Schmuck (einschließlich Ringe, Ketten und Uhren) abnehmen. Metallgegenstände erhitzen
sich, wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden, und können schwere
Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlußklemmen angeschweißt werden.
Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di alimentazione,
togliersi qualsiasi monile (inclusi anelli, collane, braccialetti ed orologi). Gli oggetti metallici
si riscaldano quando sono collegati tra punti di alimentazione e massa: possono causare
ustioni gravi oppure il metallo può saldarsi ai terminali.
Advarsel Fjern alle smykker (inkludert ringer, halskjeder og klokker) før du skal arbeide på
utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger. Metallgjenstander som er koblet til kraftledninger og
jord blir svært varme og kan forårsake alvorlige brannskader eller smelte fast til polene.
Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente, retire
todas as jóias que estiver a usar (incluindo anéis, fios e relógios). Os objectos metálicos
aquecerão em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligação à terra, podendo
causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais.
¡Advertencia! Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a líneas de alimentación,
quitarse las joyas (incluidos anillos, collares y relojes). Los objetos de metal se calientan
cuando se conectan a la alimentación y a tierra, lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves
o que los objetos metálicos queden soldados a los bornes.
Varning! Tag av alla smycken (inklusive ringar, halsband och armbandsur) innan du
arbetar på utrustning som är kopplad till kraftledningar. Metallobjekt hettas upp när de
kopplas ihop med ström och jord och kan förorsaka allvarliga brännskador; metallobjekt
kan också sammansvetsas med kontakterna.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
81
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Lightning Activity Warning
Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning
activity.
Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem, dient u niet aan het
systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen.
Varoitus Älä työskentele järjestelmän parissa äläkä yhdistä tai irrota kaapeleita
ukkosilmalla.
Attention Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les câbles pendant
un orage.
Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an bzw. trennen Sie
keine ab, wenn es gewittert.
Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un
temporale con fulmini.
Advarsel Utfør aldri arbeid på systemet, eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet når det
tordner eller lyner.
Aviso Não trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante períodos de mau tempo
(trovoada).
¡Advertencia! No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso
de descargas eléctricas en la atmósfera.
Varning! Vid åska skall du aldrig utföra arbete på systemet eller ansluta eller koppla loss
kablar.
82
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Safety Guidelines and Warnings
Operating Temperature Warning
To prevent the router from overheating, do not operate it in an area that exceeds the
maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104°F (40°C). To prevent airflow
restriction, allow at least 6 inches (15.2 cm) of clearance around the ventilation openings.
Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke router van de Juniper Networks router dan ook
oververhit raakt, dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats waar de maximale aanbevolen
omgevingstemperatuur van 40°C wordt overschreden. Om te voorkomen dat de
luchtstroom wordt beperkt, dient er minstens 15,2 cm speling rond de ventilatie-openingen
te zijn.
Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks router-sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi, sitä ei saa käyttää
tilassa, jonka lämpötila ylittää korkeimman suositellun ympäristölämpötilan 40°C. Ettei
ilmanvaihto estyisi, tuuletusaukkojen ympärille on jätettävä ainakin 15,2 cm tilaa.
Attention Pour éviter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper Networks router,
ne l'utilisez pas dans une zone où la température ambiante est supérieure à 40°C. Pour
permettre un flot d'air constant, dégagez un espace d'au moins 15 cm autour des
ouvertures de ventilations.
Warnung Um einen Router der router vor Überhitzung zu schützen, darf dieser nicht in
einer Gegend betrieben werden, in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfohlene
Maximum von 40°C überschreitet. Um Lüftungsverschluß zu verhindern, achten Sie darauf,
daß mindestens 15,2 cm lichter Raum um die Lüftungsöffnungen herum frei bleibt.
Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei router, non adoperateli in un locale che
ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40°C. Per evitare che la circolazione dell'aria
sia impedita, lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15.2 cm di fronte alle aperture delle ventole.
Advarsel Unngå overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks router Disse skal
ikke brukes på steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger
40°C (104°F). Sørg for at klaringen rundt lufteåpningene er minst 15,2 cm (6 tommer) for å
forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon.
Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks router, não
utilize este equipamento numa área que exceda a temperatura máxima recomendada de
40°C. Para evitar a restrição à circulação de ar, deixe pelo menos um espaço de 15,2 cm à
volta das aberturas de ventilação.
¡Advertencia! Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks router se
recaliente, no lo haga funcionar en un área en la que se supere la temperatura ambiente
máxima recomendada de 40°C. Para impedir la restricción de la entrada de aire, deje un
espacio mínimo de 15,2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilación.
Varning! Förhindra att en Juniper Networks router överhettas genom att inte använda den i
ett område där den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen på 40°C
överskrids. Förhindra att luftcirkulationen inskränks genom att se till att det finns fritt
utrymme på minst 15,2 cm omkring ventilationsöppningarna.
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
83
Agency Approvals
Product Disposal Warning
Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and regulations.
Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te
worden afgedankt.
Varoitus Tämän tuotteen lopullisesta hävittämisestä tulee huolehtia kaikkia
valtakunnallisia lakeja ja säännöksiä noudattaen.
Attention La mise au rebut définitive de ce produit doit être effectuée conformément à
toutes les lois et réglementations en vigueur.
Warnung Dieses Produkt muß den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend
entsorgt werden.
Avvertenza L'eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando le
normative italiane vigenti in materia.
Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet må skje i henhold til nasjonale lover og
forskrifter.
Aviso A descartagem final deste produto deverá ser efectuada de acordo com os
regulamentos e a legislação nacional.
¡Advertencia! El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse según todas las leyes y
regulaciones nacionales.
Varning! Slutlig kassering av denna produkt bör skötas i enlighet med landets alla lagar
och föreskrifter.
Agency Approvals
The router complies with the following standards:
„ Safety
84
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
„
CAN/CSA-22.2 No. 60950-00/UL 1950 Third Edition, Safety of Information
Technology Equipment
„
EN 60825-1 Safety of Laser Products - Part 1: Equipment Classification,
Requirements and User’s Guide
„
EN 60825-2 Safety of Laser Products - Part 2: Safety of Optical Fibre
Communication Systems
„
EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment
Agency Approvals
„ EMC
„
AS/NZS 3548 Class A (Australia/New Zealand)
„
BSMI Class A (Taiwan)
„
EN 55022 Class A Emissions (Europe)
„
FCC Part 15 Class A (USA)
„
VCCI Class A (Japan)
„ Immunity
„
EN 61000-3-2 Power Line Harmonics
„
EN 61000-4-2 ESD
„
EN 61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity
„
EN 61000-4-4 EFT
„
EN 61000-4-5 Surge
„
EN 61000-4-6 Low Frequency Common Immunity
„
EN 1000-4-11 Voltage Dips and Sags
„ NEBS (designed to meet these standards)
„
GR-63-Core: NEBS, Physical Protection
„
GR-1089-Core: EMC and Electrical Safety for Network Telecommunications
Equipment
„
SR-3580 NEBS Criteria Levels (Level 3 Compliance)
„ ETSI
„
ETS-300386-2 Telecommunication Network Equipment. Electromagnetic
Compatibility Requirements
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
85
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements
Canada
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
European Community
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Japan
The preceding translates as:
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
VCCI-A
Taiwan
United States
The router has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
86
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements
Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information
87
Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements
88
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
7
Prepare to Install the Router
This chapter explains how to unpack the router and verify the parts received. Before
beginning, prepare the installation site as described in “Prepare the Site” on page 39 and
review the safety information in “Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information” on
page 55. This chapter discusses the following topics:
„ Tools Required on page 89
„ General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 90
„ Prevent Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 91
„ Unpack the Router on page 92
„ Rack-Mounting Brackets on page 94
Tools Required
To unpack and install the router, you need the following tools:
„ Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
„ 9/16-in. open-end or socket wrench to remove bolts that secure the router to the
shipping pallet; if 9/16-in. tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench rather
than a fixed-size metric wrench
Prepare to Install the Router
89
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
General Safety Guidelines and Warnings
This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings. Pay careful attention to them
as you install the router:
You might find this information helpful in a particular
situation, or might otherwise overlook it.
You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid
minor injury or discomfort to you, or severe damage to the
router.
You are in a dangerous situation that could cause bodily
injury. Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the
hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar
with standard practices for preventing accidents.
Before installing the router, review the following guidelines:
„ Always follow all instructions and warnings marked on the router, router components,
and accessories.
„ Perform only those procedures explicitly described in this installation guide. Only
authorized service personnel should perform other system procedures.
„ For protection against shock hazard, verify that all power cords are disconnected before
installing or servicing the router.
„ Never install wiring during electrical storms.
„ Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for
wet environments.
„ Operate a DC-powered router only when the grounding cable is connected.
„ Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts when instructions are not
provided in this manual. Such an action could cause severe electrical shock.
„ Do not push or force any objects through any of the openings in the chassis frame. Such
an action could result in electrical shock or fire.
90
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge Damage
„ Avoid spilling liquid onto the router chassis or onto any router component. Such an
action could cause electrical shock or damage the router.
„ Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been disconnected
from their power source. Such an action could cause electrical shock.
For a complete list of safety guidelines and warnings, see
“Regulatory Compliance and Safety Information” on
page 55.
Prevent Electrostatic Discharge Damage
Many router hardware components are sensitive to damage from static electricity. Some
components can be impaired by as little as 30 V. You can easily generate potentially
damaging static voltages when you handle plastic or foam packing material or if you move
components across plastic or carpet. To prevent intermittent or complete component
failures, always take ESD precautions:
To minimize the potential for ESD damage, observe the following guidelines:
„ Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap, and make sure that it is in direct contact
with your skin.
For equipment safety, periodically check the resistance
value of the antistatic strap. The measurement should
range from 1 to 10 Mohms.
„ When handling any component that is removed from the chassis, make sure the
equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the electrostatic discharge points
on the chassis, which are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
„ Avoid contact between the board and your clothing. ESD emitted from clothing can
damage components.
„ When removing or installing a component, always place it component-side up on an
antistatic surface, in an antistatic card rack, or in an electrostatic bag (see Figure 21). If
you are returning a component to the factory, immediately store the component in an
electrostatic bag.
Prepare to Install the Router
91
Unpack the Router
Figure 21: Place a Board Component into an Electrostatic Bag
CAUTION
ELECTROSTATIC
SENSITIVE
DEVICES
1051
DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE
EXCEPT AT A
STATIC-FREE WORKSTATION
Unpack the Router
The router is shipped in a wooden crate and bolted to the pallet that forms the bottom of the
crate. The crate also contains an accessory box, the handle used during manual router
installation, and the M40 Internet Router Installation Quick Start poster.
The router is maximally protected inside the shipping
crate. Do not unpack it until you are ready to begin
installation.
To unpack the system, follow these steps:
92
1.
Move the shipping crate to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible, but
where you have enough room to remove the system components. While the chassis is
bolted to the pallet, you can use a forklift to move it.
2.
Position the crate so that the arrows are pointing up.
3.
Open the top flaps on the crate.
4.
Remove the accessory box (see Figure 22).
5.
Open the accessory box and verify the contents against the parts inventory on the label
attached to the box.
6.
Lift the crate off the pallet.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Unpack the Router
Figure 22: Contents of the Shipping Crate
This end up
Carton flaps
Accessory box
Shipping carton
Chassis
Shipping bracket bolts chassis
to pallet
Pallet
7.
Verify the chassis components received against the packing list included with the router.
A generic parts inventory appears in Table 19. If any part is missing, contact a customer
service representative.
8.
Use a 9/16-in. open-end or socket wrench to loosen and remove the bolts on the
brackets that attach the chassis to the pallet. If a 9/16-in. tool is not available, use pliers
or an adjustable wrench rather than a fixed-size metric wrench.
9.
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws that secure the brackets to the sides of
the chassis, and remove the brackets. Store the brackets, screws, and bolts inside the
accessory box.
10. Save the shipping crate, packing materials, and pallet in case you later need to move or
ship the router.
11. Proceed to “Install the Router and Configure Software” on page 97 to continue with the
installation.
Table 19: Generic Inventory of Router Components Installed in Chassis
Component
Quantity Shipped
FPC with up to 4 PICs installed
Up to 8
PIC
Up to 4 per FPC
SCB
1
Lower impeller assembly and craft interface
1
Backplane
1
Upper impeller assembly
1
Fan tray with 3 fans
1
Prepare to Install the Router
93
Rack-Mounting Brackets
Component
Quantity Shipped
Routing Engine
1
Power supply with integrated fan
2
Rack-Mounting Brackets
Front rack-mounting ears are built into the chassis sides, as shown in Figure 23. If requested,
a center rack-mounting kit can be shipped with the router (see Figure 24). You attach center
rack-mounting ears along the middle of either side of the chassis with the screws provided.
Figure 23: Chassis Showing Mounting Ears
Front rack-mounting ear
Cable managment
system
Card cage
Backplane
Slide guides for FPCs
ESD point
Craft interface
Center rack-mounting ear
1002
Air filter
A C-bracket shelf can also be requested, to provide additional support when a router is
mounted above another router (in the upper half of the rack). A router mounted in the lowest
position in the rack is supported by the floor or by the bottom rack rail, so the C-bracket shelf
is not required in that case. Figure 24 shows the C-bracket shelf.
94
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Rack-Mounting Brackets
Figure 24: Optional C-Bracket Shelf, Center-Mounting Ears, and Screws
Mounting ears
Screws
1016
C-bracket
Side handles can also be requested (see Figure 25), to make it easier to lift the chassis into
the rack. They are recommended if a mechanical lift is not used.
1253-B
Figure 25: Chassis Side Handles
M40 handle
Prepare to Install the Router
95
Rack-Mounting Brackets
96
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
8
Install the Router and Configure Software
Before installing the router, prepare the site as described in “Prepare the Site” on page 39 and
unpack the router from the shipping crate as described in “Unpack the Router” on page 92.
You can install the router into a rack either with or without the help of a mechanical lift.
Because a fully configured router weighs approximately 280 lb (127 kg), using a mechanical
lift is recommended. If you do not use a lift, you must remove most components from the
chassis to reduce its weight before installation, then reinstall them before powering on the
router.
This chapter describes both methods, and also describes how to connect management and
alarm devices, PIC cables, and power cables:
„ Tools and Parts Required on page 97
„ Install the Router Using a Mechanical Lift on page 98
„ Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift on page 99
„ Connect the Router to Management and Alarm Devices on page 119
„ Connect PIC Cables on page 121
„ Provide Power to the Router on page 122
„ Configure the JUNOS Internet Software on page 127
Tools and Parts Required
You need the following tools and parts to install the chassis and its components:
„ Mechanical lift (recommended)
„ Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
„ Flat-blade (–) screwdriver, 2.5 mm (for serial cable connector)
„ Phillips (+) screwdriver, 2.5 mm (for alarm relay contacts)
„ Electrostatic bags or antistatic mats, one for each electronic component removed during
installation without a mechanical lift
„ ESD grounding wrist strap
Install the Router and Configure Software
97
Install the Router Using a Mechanical Lift
„ Wire cutters
„ Pliers
Install the Router Using a Mechanical Lift
Using a mechanical lift to maneuver the router into the rack is recommended because of the
router’s size and weight. The lift must be able to accommodate the router’s
weight—approximately 280 lb (127 kg) fully configured—and must fit between the support
posts of the rack.
If you are installing two routers in one rack, install the
lower one first.
First, perform the following prerequisite procedures:
„ Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow
and maintenance, and secure it to the building structure. For details, see “Rack
Requirements” on page 39.
„ Read the information in “Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings” on page 71,
with particular attention to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines” on page 72.
„ Remove the router from the shipping crate, as described in “Prepare to Install the
Router” on page 89.
Then, perform the following procedures to install the router:
1.
98
If you are installing the router in the upper half of the rack, install the C-bracket first (see
“Rack-Mounting Brackets” on page 94). Follow this procedure:
a.
Select the height in the rack at which to mount the C-bracket. The M40 router is
35 in. (89 cm or 20 U) high, so if you are mounting two routers in the rack
leave at least that much distance between the C-bracket shelf and both the top
and bottom cross-pieces of the rack.
b.
As you stand in front of the rack, position the C-bracket so that the shelf is
protruding toward you, and align the C-bracket mounting holes with holes in
the rack rails. If you are front mounting the router, install the C-bracket into the
rack from the rear. Make sure the mounting holes on both sides are parallel.
c.
Insert and tighten the provided screws.
2.
If you are center-mounting the router, attach a center-mounting ear to either side of the
chassis. For information about the center-mounting ears, see “Rack-Mounting Brackets”
on page 94.
3.
Load the router onto the lift, making sure it rests securely on the lift platform.
4.
Use the lift to position the router at the correct height in the rack.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
5.
Align the bottom hole in both front- or center-mounting ears with a hole in each rack
rail, making sure the chassis is level.
6.
Install one of the mounting screws provided (in the accessory box shipped with the
router) into each of the two aligned holes.
7.
Moving up each post or ear, install a screw in every mounting hole.
8.
Verify that all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting
screws on the opposite side and that the router is level.
9.
Move the lift away from the rack.
10. To complete the installation, proceed to “Connect the Router to Management and Alarm
Devices” on page 119.
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
If you cannot use a mechanical lift to lift the router into the rack, you can install it manually.
First you need to reduce the weight by removing components from the chassis. The reduced
chassis weight is approximately 180 lb (82 kg), so lifting it safely still requires three people to
lift and one to insert the mounting screws.
Table 20 lists the weight of major components.
Table 20: Chassis Component Weights
Component
Approximate Weight
(lb)
Approximate Weight
(kg)
Air filter
0.5
0.2
Cable management system
2
1
Fan tray
5
2
FPC with 4 PICs installed
3
1
Lower impeller assembly with craft interface
9
4
Power supply
20
9
Routing Engine housing
17
8
Upper impeller assembly
10
4
System Control Board (SCB)
1
0.5
To install the router without a mechanical lift, perform the procedures described in the
following sections:
„ Remove Components from the Chassis on page 100
„ Install the Chassis into the Rack on page 109
„ Reinstall Components into the Chassis on page 111
Install the Router and Configure Software
99
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Remove Components from the Chassis
To make the router light enough to install without a mechanical lift, you must remove most of
the components.
The procedures in this section apply only to initial
installation and assume that you have not yet connected
power to the router. If power is connected, completely
disconnect it before continuing. See “Disconnect AC Power
from the Router” on page 140 or “Disconnect DC Power
from the Router” on page 147.
If you are installing or replacing components in an
operational router, see the appropriate chapters in Part 3.
Do not stack components on top of one another after
removing them from the chassis. Place each one
individually on a flat, stable surface, either on an antistatic
mat or in an electrostatic bag.
Set the removed components far enough away from the
installation site that they will not be in the way as you lift
the chassis into the rack.
Perform the procedures described in the following sections to remove components from the
chassis:
„ Remove the Power Supplies on page 101
„ Remove the Routing Engine Housing on page 102
„ Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly on page 102
„ Remove the Fan Tray on page 103
„ Remove the Cable Management System on page 104
„ Remove the FPCs on page 105
„ Remove the SCB on page 106
„ Remove the Air Filter on page 107
„ Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly on page 108
100
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Remove the Power Supplies
The router has two power supplies (either AC or DC) located at the bottom rear of the chassis
(see Figure 2). Each power supply weighs approximately 20 lb (9 kg).
To remove the power supplies, follow this procedure (see Figure 26, which shows an AC
power supply):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Verify that the power switch on the faceplate of both power supplies is in the OFF (O)
position.
3.
Loosen the thumbscrew at each upper corner of the power supply faceplate, using a
Phillips screwdriver if necessary.
4.
Lift and hold up the safety interlock lever. (On an AC power supply, the lever is just below
the appliance inlet. On a DC power supply, it is just below the power switch.)
5.
While holding the safety interlock lever up, turn the extractor/inserter counterclockwise
until the power supply disengages from the backplane.
6.
Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to slide the unit about
halfway out of the chassis.
7.
Place one hand under the power supply to support it, then slide it completely out of the
chassis.
8.
Repeat Steps 3 through 7 to remove the second power supply.
Figure 26: Remove a Power Supply
Captive screw
Extractor/inserter
1018
Safety
interlock lever
Install the Router and Configure Software
101
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Remove the Routing Engine Housing
The Routing Engine resides in a metal housing in the rear of the chassis, below the fan tray
(see Figure 2). The Routing Engine housing weighs approximately 17 lb (8 kg) and is about
16 in. (40.64 cm) deep.
To remove the Routing Engine housing, follow this procedure (see Figure 27):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Unscrew the screws along the left and right edges of the Routing Engine housing (six in
all), using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.
3.
Grasp the handles located at either side of the Routing Engine housing, and slide the unit
about halfway out of the chassis.
4.
Move one of your hands underneath the housing to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
Figure 27: Remove the Routing Engine Housing
Mounting screws
1019
Mounting screws
Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly
The upper impeller assembly is located at the top rear of the chassis, above the fan tray (see
Figure 2). The assembly weighs approximately 10 lb (4 kg).
To remove the upper impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 28):
102
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Unscrew the captive screws at the bottom corners of the assembly, using a Phillips
screwdriver if necessary.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
3.
Grasp the handle at the top of the assembly, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis.
4.
Move one of your hands underneath the assembly to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
1021
Figure 28: Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly
Remove the Fan Tray
The fan tray is located at the rear of the chassis, beneath the upper impeller assembly (see
Figure 2). On some M40 routers, the tray is covered by a protective screen. You do not need
to remove the screen before removing the fan tray from the chassis. The fan tray weighs
approximately 5 lb (2 kg).
To remove the fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 29):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Unscrew the screws at the outer corners of the fan tray (not the screws that attach the
protective screen), using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.
3.
Grasp the sides of the fan tray and pull firmly to slide it out of the chassis.
1040
Figure 29: Remove the Fan Tray
Install the Router and Configure Software
103
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Remove the Cable Management System
The cable management system is located at the top front of the chassis, above the card cage
(see Figure 1). It weighs only about 1 lb (0.5 kg), but you might want to remove it so that it
does not interfere with your hand hold as you lift the chassis.
To remove the cable management system, follow this procedure:
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Unscrew the two captive screws on top of the cable management system cover and
remove the cover (see Figure 30).
3.
Unscrew the four screws on the faceplate of the cable management system (see
Figure 31).
4.
Remove the unit from the chassis.
Figure 30: Remove the Cable Management System Cover
1077
Captive screws
1050
Figure 31: Remove the Cable Management System
104
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Remove the FPCs
The router can have up to eight FPCs mounted vertically in the FPC card cage at the front of
the chassis (see Figure 1). An FPC that houses four PICs weighs about 3 lb (1.5 kg).
To help you work systematically, the following procedure
directs you to remove FPCs starting at the left side of the
card cage and working toward the right. You can remove
FPCs in any order, however. As you remove each FPC, label
it with its slot number and record the relevant information
in the checklist in Table 21.
Table 21: FPC Removal Checklist
Slot
Media Type
Removed
Reinstalled
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
To remove the FPCs, follow this procedure:
1.
Place an antistatic mat or electrostatic bag on a flat, stable surface to receive each FPC.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Locate the FPC or blank panel located in the leftmost slot of the card cage on the front of
the chassis. It is directly above the offline button on the craft interface that is labeled 0
(zero).
4.
If the slot is covered by a blank panel, you can leave it in place. If the slot contains an
FPC, perform the following steps:
a.
Loosen the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC, using a Phillips screwdriver if
necessary.
b.
Pull the ends of the extractor clips, which are adjacent to the thumbscrews, toward
the outer edges of the FPC (see Figure 32).
Install the Router and Configure Software
105
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
c.
Grasp both sides of the card carrier and slide the FPC about halfway out of the card
cage.
d.
Place one hand under the FPC to support it, slide it completely out of the chassis,
and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag prepared in Step 1.
Do not stack FPCs on top of one another (or any other
components) after removal. Place each one individually in
an electrostatic bag or on its own antistatic mat on a flat,
stable surface.
5.
Repeat Step 4 for each FPC card carrier or blank cover, proceeding from left to right.
Figure 32: Remove an FPC
Extractor clip
Thumbscrew
FPC
1060a
LEDs and offline
button
Remove the SCB
The SCB is located at the center of the card cage, at the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). It
weighs approximately 1 lb (0.5 kg).
To remove the SCB, follow this procedure (see Figure 33):
106
1.
Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the SCB.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Unscrew the thumbscrew at each end of the SCB, using a Phillips screwdriver if
necessary.
4.
Pull the ends of the extractor clips (which are adjacent to the thumbscrews) toward the
outer edges of the SCB.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
5.
Grasp both sides of the SCB and slide it about halfway out of the chassis.
6.
Place one hand under the SCB to support it, slide it completely out of the chassis, and
place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag prepared in Step 1.
Figure 33: Remove the SCB
Extractor clip
1052
Thumbscrew
Remove the Air Filter
The air filter is located below the craft interface at the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). The
air filter weighs less than 0.5 lb (0.2 kg), but you must remove it in order to remove the lower
impeller assembly.
To remove the air filter, follow this procedure (see Figure 34):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Grasp the sides of the air filter and firmly pull it out from the chassis.
Install the Router and Configure Software
107
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Figure 34: Remove the Air Filter
1039
Craft interface display
Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly
The lower impeller assembly is located just above the air intake on the front of the chassis,
behind the craft interface (see Figure 1). The assembly weighs approximately 9 lb (4 kg).
To remove the lower impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 35):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Unscrew the three screws at the bottom edge of the assembly, using a Phillips
screwdriver if necessary.
3.
Grasp the sides of the assembly, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis.
4.
Move one of your hands underneath the assembly to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
Figure 35: Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly
Impellers
Craft interface display
1023
Screws
108
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Install the Chassis into the Rack
After you have removed components as described in “Remove Components from the
Chassis” on page 100, the chassis is light enough for a team of installers to lift into the rack.
Lifting the empty chassis and mounting it into a rack
requires three people to lift and a fourth person to secure
the mounting screws. The empty chassis weighs
approximately 180 lb (82 kg).
If you are installing two routers in a rack, install the lower
one first.
First, perform the following prerequisite procedures:
„ Place the rack in its permanent location, allowing adequate clearance for airflow
and maintenance, and secure it to the building structure. For details, see “Rack
Requirements” on page 39.
„ Read the information in “Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings” on page 71,
with particular attention to “Chassis Lifting Guidelines” on page 72.
„ Remove the router from the shipping crate, as described in “Prepare to Install the
Router” on page 89.
„ Remove chassis components, as directed in “Remove Components from the
Chassis” on page 100.
Then, perform the following procedures to install the router:
1.
If you are installing the router in the upper half of the rack, install the C-bracket first (see
“Rack-Mounting Brackets” on page 94). Follow this procedure:
a.
Select the height in the rack at which to mount the C-bracket. The M40 router is
35 in. (89 cm or 20 U) high, so if you are mounting two routers in the rack
leave at least that much distance between the C-bracket shelf and both the top
and bottom cross-pieces of the rack.
b.
As you stand in front of the rack, position the C-bracket so that the shelf is
protruding toward you, and align the C-bracket mounting holes with holes in
the rack rails. If you are front mounting the router, install the C-bracket into the
rack from the rear. Make sure the mounting holes on both sides are parallel.
c.
Insert and tighten the provided screws.
2.
If you are center-mounting the router, attach a center-mounting ear to either side of the
chassis. For information about the center-mounting ears, see “Rack-Mounting Brackets”
on page 94.
3.
If desired, attach a lifting handle on either side of the chassis (see “Rack-Mounting
Brackets” on page 94).
Install the Router and Configure Software
109
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
4.
Prepare to lift the router:
„ A person stands on either side of the chassis. Each grasps the side edge of the FPC
card cage with one hand, and either grasps the lifting handle with the other hand or
places the other hand under the chassis near the rear.
„ A third person stands behind the chassis and lifts from under it with both hands.
5.
Lift the chassis and position it in the rack. If the C-bracket is installed, rest the router on
it. Align the bottom hole in both front- or center-mounting ears with a hole in each rack
rail, making sure the chassis is level. See Figure 36.
Figure 36: Install the Chassis in a Rack
Center-mounting rack
C-bracket
1024
Chassis center
rack-mounting ear
110
6.
Install one of the mounting screws provided (in the accessory box shipped with the
router) into each of the two aligned holes.
7.
Moving up each post or ear, install a screw in every mounting hole.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
8.
Verify that all the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting
screws on the opposite side and that the router is level.
9.
Proceed to the instructions in “Reinstall Components into the Chassis” on page 111.
Reinstall Components into the Chassis
After you have mounted the chassis in the rack as described in “Install the Chassis into the
Rack” on page 109, reinstall the router components into the chassis.
The procedures in this section apply only to initial
installation and assume that you have not yet connected
power to the router. If power is connected, completely
disconnect it before continuing. See “Disconnect AC Power
from the Router” on page 140 or “Disconnect DC Power
from the Router” on page 147.
If you are installing or replacing components in an
operational router, see the appropriate chapters in Part 3.
Perform the procedures described in the following sections to reinstall components in the
chassis:
„ Reinstall the Lower Impeller Assembly on page 111
„ Reinstall the Air Filter on page 112
„ Reinstall the SCB on page 113
„ Reinstall the FPCs on page 114
„ Reinstall the Cable Management System on page 115
„ Reinstall the Fan Tray on page 116
„ Reinstall the Upper Impeller Assembly on page 117
„ Reinstall the Routing Engine Housing on page 117
„ Reinstall the Power Supplies on page 118
Reinstall the Lower Impeller Assembly
The lower impeller assembly is located just above the air intake on the front of the chassis,
behind the craft interface (see Figure 1). To reinstall it, follow this procedure (see Figure 37):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Grasp the sides of the lower impeller assembly, and align the rear of the tray with the
slider bars inside the chassis.
Install the Router and Configure Software
111
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
3.
Slide the assembly all the way into the chassis.
4.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the three captive screws at the bottom edge of the
assembly to seat it firmly in the chassis.
Figure 37: Reinstall the Lower Impeller Assembly
1062
Screws
Reinstall the Air Filter
The air filter is located below the craft interface at the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). To
reinstall it, follow this procedure (see Figure 38):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Grasp the sides of the air filter and push it firmly over the air intake, inserting its metal
prongs into the chassis.
1064
Figure 38: Reinstall the Air Filter
112
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Reinstall the SCB
The SCB is located at the center of the card cage, at the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). To
reinstall it, follow this procedure (see Figure 39):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Grasp the front of the SCB with both hands and align the rear of the card carrier with the
slide guides in the card cage.
3.
Slide the SCB all the way into the card cage until it contacts the backplane.
4.
Push the ends of the extractor clips (which are located at each end of the SCB) towards
each other to secure the SCB in the chassis.
5.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the SCB to seat the
unit firmly in the chassis.
Figure 39: Reinstall the SCB
Extractor clip
1049
Thumbscrew
Install the Router and Configure Software
113
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Reinstall the FPCs
The FPCs install into the card cage at the front of the chassis, as shown in Figure 1.
To help you work systematically, the following procedure
directs you to reinstall FPCs starting at the left side of the
card cage and working toward the right. You can install
FPCs in any order, however.
Be sure there is a blank panel over every empty slot. The
blank panels must be in place during router operation to
guarantee adequate circulation of cooling air.
To reinstall the FPCs, follow this procedure:
114
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Locate the leftmost slot in the FPC card cage on the front of the chassis. It is directly
above the offline button on the craft interface that is labeled 0 (zero).
3.
Locate the FPC that you labeled 0 during removal. Verify that the ends of the extractor
clips, which are located at each end of the FPC, are pushed outward, toward the ends of
the FPC.
4.
Grasp the front of the FPC with both hands and align the rear of the card carrier with the
slide guides in the card cage.
5.
Slide the FPC all the way into the card cage until it contacts the backplane.
6.
Push the ends of the extractor clips toward each other to secure the FPC in the chassis.
7.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC to seat the
unit firmly in the chassis.
8.
Repeat Steps 4 through 7 for each FPC, proceeding from left to right through the
remaining FPC slots.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Figure 40: Reinstall an FPC
Extractor clip
Thumbscrew
FPC
1060
LEDs and offline
button
Reinstall the Cable Management System
The cable management system is located at the top front of the chassis, above the card cage
(see Figure 1). If you removed it in “Remove the Cable Management System” on page 104,
follow this procedure to reinstall it:
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Place the cable management system on the chassis, aligning the screws on its faceplate
with the mounting holes on the chassis (see Figure 41).
3.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws.
4.
Replace the cable management system cover and tighten its captive screws to the top of
the metal prongs at either end of the cable management system (see Figure 42).
1075
Figure 41: Reinstall the Cable Management System
Install the Router and Configure Software
115
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Figure 42: Reinstall the Cable Management System Cover
1076
Captive screws
Reinstall the Fan Tray
The fan tray is located at the rear of the chassis, beneath the upper impeller assembly (see
Figure 2). On some M40 routers, the tray is covered by a protective screen, which should
already be in place on the tray. To reinstall the tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 43):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Slide the fan tray into the chassis.
3.
Align the screws at the corners of the fan tray with the mounting holes at the edges of
the opening and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws.
1053
Figure 43: Reinstall the Fan Tray
116
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
Reinstall the Upper Impeller Assembly
The upper impeller assembly is located at the top rear of the chassis, above the fan tray (see
Figure 2). To reinstall it, follow this procedure (see Figure 44):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Grasp the handle at the top of the assembly and slide the assembly all the way into the
chassis.
3.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews at the lower corners of the
assembly.
1054
Figure 44: Reinstall the Upper Impeller Assembly
Reinstall the Routing Engine Housing
The Routing Engine resides in a metal housing in the rear of the chassis, below the fan tray
(see Figure 2). To reinstall the Routing Engine housing, follow this procedure (see Figure 45):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Place one hand underneath the unit to support it and grasp a handle on the front of the
unit with the other hand.
3.
Align the rear of the unit with the slide guides in the chassis.
4.
Slide the unit completely into the chassis.
5.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws along the left and right edges of the
Routing Engine housing (six in all).
Install the Router and Configure Software
117
Install the Router without Using a Mechanical Lift
1055
Figure 45: Reinstall the Routing Engine Housing
Reinstall the Power Supplies
The router has two power supplies (either AC or DC) located at the bottom rear of the chassis
(see Figure 2). To reinstall the power supplies, follow this procedure (see Figure 46, which
shows an AC power supply):
118
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Verify that the power switch on the faceplate of both power supplies is in the OFF (O)
position.
3.
Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate with one hand and place the other hand
under the unit to support it.
4.
With a finger of the hand that is grasping the handle, lift and hold up the safety interlock
lever. (On an AC power supply, the lever is just below the appliance inlet. On a DC power
supply, it is just below the power switch.)
5.
While holding the safety interlock lever up, slide the power supply into the chassis until
it contacts the backplane.
6.
Still holding the safety interlock lever up, turn the extractor/inserter clockwise until the
power supply engages with the connectors on the backplane.
7.
Push the safety interlock lever down.
8.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten (but do not overtighten) the thumbscrew at each
upper corner of the power supply faceplate.
9.
Repeat Steps 3 through 8 to reinstall the second power supply.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Connect the Router to Management and Alarm Devices
Figure 46: Reinstall a Power Supply
Extractor/inserter
Captive
screw
1035
Safety interlock lever
Connect the Router to Management and Alarm Devices
After you have installed the router into the rack, connect the Routing Engine to one or more
external devices for management and service operations. Figure 47 shows the location of the
Routing Engine interface ports and alarm relay contacts on the craft interface. For
specifications for the cable and wire that inserts into the ports, see “Routing Engine Interface
Cable and Wire Specifications” on page 53.
Figure 47: Routing Engine Interface Ports on the Craft Interface
FAIL
OK
0
NC
C
NO
OK
FAIL
1
RED
ALARM
2
ALARM
FAIL
OK
3
FAIL
OK
4
MENU
FAIL
OK
FAIL
OK
5
FAIL
6
OK
7
ROUTING ENGINE
OK
ALARM
CUTOFF
YELLOW
ALARM
OK
FAIL
ENTER
MANAGEMENT
ETHERNET
CONSOLE
AUXILIARY
1065
NC
C
NO
FAIL
Alarm relay contacts
Routing Engine ports
To connect external devices, perform the procedures described in the following sections:
„ Connect to a Network for Out-of-Band Management on page 120
„ Connect to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device on page 120
„ Connect to an External Alarm-Reporting Device on page 121
Install the Router and Configure Software
119
Connect the Router to Management and Alarm Devices
Connect to a Network for Out-of-Band Management
Connect the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management through the
MANAGEMENT ETHERNET port on the craft interface. One cable with RJ-45/RJ-45 connectors is
provided with the router, as detailed in “Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire
Specifications” on page 53. Follow this procedure:
1.
Plug one end of the Ethernet cable (the connector is shown in Figure 48) into the
MANAGEMENT ETHERNET port on the craft interface.
2.
Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.
1063
Figure 48: Routing Engine Ethernet Cable Connector
Connect to a Management Console or Auxiliary Device
You can configure and manage the router on a system console connected to the Routing
Engine through the CONSOLE port on the craft interface, or on a laptop, modem, or other
auxiliary device connected through the AUXILIARY port. One RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable
with DB-9/DB-9 connectors is provided with the router, as detailed in “Routing Engine
Interface Cable and Wire Specifications” on page 53. (If you want to connect a device to both
ports, you must supply another cable.)
To connect a management console or auxiliary device, follow this procedure:
1.
2.
Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.
Plug the female end (shown in Figure 49) of the provided console cable into the
CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port.
3.
Tighten the screws on the connector, using a 2.5-mm flat-blade screwdriver if necessary.
4.
Attach the other end of the cable to the console or auxiliary device.
1027
Figure 49: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector
120
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Connect PIC Cables
Connect to an External Alarm-Reporting Device
You can connect the router to external alarm-reporting devices through the relay contacts on
the craft interface next to the LEDs labeled RED ALARM and YELLOW ALARM (see Figure 47). A
system condition that triggers the red or yellow alarm LED on the craft interface also
activates the corresponding alarm relay contact.
The alarm relay contacts accept wire of any gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.09 and
2.09 mm2) wire, which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire appropriate for the external
device that you are connecting to the contacts.
To connect an external device to an alarm relay contact, follow this procedure:
1.
Prepare the required length of wire with gauge between 28-AWG and 14-AWG (0.09 and
2.09 mm2).
2.
Use a 2.5 mm Phillips screwdriver to loosen the small screws on the faceplate of the
appropriate alarm relay contact—the upper contact for a device that reports high priority
(red) alarms, or the lower contact for the device that reports lower priority (yellow)
alarms.
3.
Insert wires into the appropriate slots in the front of the relay contact (NC means
“normally closed,” C means “common,” and NO means “normally open”).
4.
Attach the other end of the wires to the external device.
To attach a reporting device for the other kind of alarm, repeat Steps 1 through 4.
Connect PIC Cables
Now plug network cable into the PICs housed in the FPCs. For information about the cable
used by the PICs supported on the M40 router, see the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC
Guide.
To connect the PIC cables into the PIC cable connectors at the front of the chassis, follow this
procedure:
1.
Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIC.
2.
If the PIC cable connector port is covered by a rubber safety plug, remove the plug.
Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or
the transceivers on the faceplate of a PIC that connects to
fiber-optic cable. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the
PICs that use it (such as ATM or SONET/SDH) emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.
Do not leave a transceiver uncovered except when
removing or inserting the cable. The safety cap keeps the
port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
3.
Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIC faceplate (see
Figure 50, which shows a fiber-optic connector).
Install the Router and Configure Software
121
Provide Power to the Router
4.
Carefully thread the cable through the hooks in the cable management system at the
upper front of the chassis (see Figure 1), to prevent the cable from dislodging or
developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it
hangs to the floor. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable
management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to maintain its shape.
Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend
radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can
damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to
diagnose.
Never let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.
Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle, which
stresses the cable at the fastening point.
Figure 50: Connect Cable to a PIC
1034
Precharge pins
Provide Power to the Router
Connect the router to external power sources and power it on by performing the following
procedures:
„ Connect Power to an AC-Powered Router on page 123
„ Connect Power to a DC-Powered Router on page 123
„ Power On the Router on page 125
122
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Provide Power to the Router
Connect Power to an AC-Powered Router
You connect power to an AC-powered router by plugging the power cord supplied with each
power supply into the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate and into an AC power
source receptacle.
To connect the AC power cords, follow this procedure:
1.
Verify that the switch on each power supply faceplate is in the OFF (O) position.
2.
Locate the power cords shipped with the router, which should have a plug appropriate
for your geographical location (see “AC Power Cord Specifications” on page 45).
3.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
4.
Insert the appliance coupler end of a power cord into the appliance inlet on a power
supply faceplate and insert the plug into an AC power source receptacle. Verify that the
power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people could
trip on it.
5.
Repeat Step 4 for the other power supply.
Connect Power to a DC-Powered Router
Connect power to a DC-powered router by attaching power cables from external DC power
sources to the terminal studs on each power supply. Power and grounding cables are not
supplied with the router. For information about the required cable type, see “DC Power and
Grounding Cable Specifications” on page 46.
The router must be connected to two separate external DC
power sources, one for each power supply.
There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The
color coding used by the external DC power source at your
site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
cables that attach to the circuit breaker box. You must
ensure that the connections at the circuit breaker box
maintain the proper polarity. The power source DC cables
might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.
To connect DC power cables to the power supplies, follow this procedure:
1.
Ensure that the voltage across the leads of the DC power cables that you are connecting
to the circuit breaker box is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cable leads might
become active during installation.
2.
Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the cable lugs provided with the router to
the grounding and power cables.
Install the Router and Configure Software
123
Provide Power to the Router
3.
Verify that the power switch is in the OFF (0) position (see Figure 51).
Power switch
1128a
Figure 51: DC Power Switch in the Off Position
4.
Attach the grounding cable to a proper earth ground for both external DC power sources,
if it is not already.
5.
Remove the nuts and locking washers that are preinstalled on the grounding studs at the
lower right corner of the power supply faceplate. Slide the grounding cable lug onto the
studs and replace the washers and nuts. Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, tighten
the nuts.
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that
does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in.
tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
6.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the screws securing the protective shield over the
power terminal studs. Remove the shield. Remove the outer nut and washer that are
preinstalled on each terminal stud.
7.
Slide the power cable lugs onto the terminal studs on the power supply faceplate (see
Figure 52):
„ Connect the positive (+) source cable lug to the return terminal, which is labeled
RTN.
„ Connect the negative (–) source cable lug to the input terminal, which is labeled
–48V.
Run the power cables to the left on the left power supply, and to the right on the right
power supply. This arrangement enables you to replace a power supply without having
to detach the cables from the other power supply.
124
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Provide Power to the Router
Figure 52: Attach Cables to the DC Power Supply
.
Locking
washers
Cable lug
Terminal studs
Input
Return
1131
Nuts
Grounding studs
8.
Secure the power cable lugs to the terminal studs, first with a washer, then with a nut
(the washers and nuts are provided with the router). Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or
wrench, tighten the nuts.
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that
does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in.
tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
9.
Verify that the source power cabling and the grounding cabling are correct, that they are
not touching or blocking access to router components, and that they do not drape where
people could trip on them.
10. Replace the clear cover over the terminal studs and tighten the screws that secure it to
the power supply.
11. Repeat Steps 3 through 10 to reinstall the second power supply.
Power On the Router
To power on the router, follow this procedure:
1.
Make certain that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis and the
thumbscrews on their faceplates are tightened.
2.
For both power supplies on an AC-powered router, make certain that the ends of the
power cord are firmly plugged into the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate and
the external power source receptacle.
For both power supplies on a DC-powered router, make certain that the positive (+)
source DC power cable lug is connected to the return terminal (labeled RTN) and the
negative (–) power cable lug is connected to the input terminal (labeled –48V).
Install the Router and Configure Software
125
Provide Power to the Router
3.
Turn on the power to the management device that is connected to the Routing Engine
through the craft interface port labeled CONSOLE, AUXILIARY, or MANAGEMENT ETHERNET.
For more information on connecting management devices, see “Connect the Router to
Management and Alarm Devices” on page 119.
4.
Press the power switch on one power supply to the ON ( | ) position. Verify that the green
LED labeled OK on the power supply faceplate eventually lights steadily.
After a power supply is turned on, it can take up to 60
seconds for status indicators—such as LEDs on the power
supply, show chassis commands, and messages on the
craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
during the first 60 seconds.
The Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes
its startup sequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting
and you need to power down the router again, first issue
the CLI request system halt command. For complete
instructions, see “Disconnect AC Power from the Router”
on page 140 or “Disconnect DC Power from the Router”
on page 147.
If after powering on the power supply you must power it
off, wait at least 60 seconds. After powering off a power
supply, wait 60 seconds before turning it back on.
126
5.
Press the power switch on other power supply to the ON ( | ) position and confirm that
the OK LED lights as described in Step 4. If the LED is not lit after 60 seconds, repeat the
power supply and cable installation procedures described in “Reinstall the Power
Supplies” on page 118, and “Connect Power to an AC-Powered Router” on page 123 or
“Connect Power to a DC-Powered Router” on page 123.
6.
On the management device, monitor the startup process to verify that the system has
booted properly.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Configure the JUNOS Internet Software
Configure the JUNOS Internet Software
The router is shipped with the JUNOS Internet software preinstalled and ready to be
configured when the router is powered on. There are three copies of the software: one on a
nonrotating flash disk in the Routing Engine, one on a rotating hard disk in the Routing
Engine, and one on an LS-120 disk that ships with the router.
When the router boots, it first attempts to start the image from an LS-120 disk if one is
installed in the LS-120 drive. If an LS-120 disk is not installed or the attempt otherwise fails,
the router next tries the flash disk, then finally the hard disk.
You configure the router by issuing JUNOS command-line interface (CLI) commands, either
on a console device attached to the CONSOLE port on the craft interface, or over a telnet
connection to a network connected to the MANAGEMENT ETHERNET port on the craft
interface. Gather the following information before configuring the router:
„ Name the router will use on the network
„ Domain name the router will use
„ IP address and prefix length information for the Ethernet interface
„ IP address of a default router
„ IP address of a DNS server
„ Password for the root user
To configure the software, follow this procedure:
1.
If the router is not already turned on, power it on as described in “Power On the Router”
on page 125.
2.
Log in as the “root” user. There is no password.
3.
Start the CLI.
root# cli
root@>
4.
Enter configuration mode.
cli> configure
[edit]
root@#
5.
Configure the name of the router. If the name includes spaces, enclose the name in
quotation marks (" ").
[edit]
root@# set system host-name host-name
6.
Configure the router’s domain name.
[edit]
root@# set system domain-name domain-name
Install the Router and Configure Software
127
Configure the JUNOS Internet Software
7.
Configure the IP address and prefix length for the router’s Ethernet interface.
[edit]
root@# set interfaces fxp0 unit 0 family inet address address/prefix-length
8.
Configure the IP address of a backup router, which is used only while the routing
protocol is not running.
[edit]
root@# set system backup-router address
9.
Configure the IP address of a DNS server.
[edit]
root@# set system name-server address
10. Set the root authentication password by entering either a clear-text password, an
encrypted password, or an ssh public key string (DSA or RSA).
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication plain-text-password
New password: password
Retype new password: password
or
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication encrypted-password encrypted-password
or
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication ssh-dsa public-key
or
[edit]
root@# set system root-authentication ssh-rsa public-key
128
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Configure the JUNOS Internet Software
11. Optionally, display the configuration to verify that it is correct.
[edit]
root@# show
system {
host-name host-name;
domain-name domain-name;
backup-router address;
root-authentication {
authentication-method (password | public-key);
}
name-server {
address;
}
}
interfaces {
fxp0 {
unit 0 {
family inet {
address address/prefix-length;
}
}
}
}
12. Commit the configuration to activate it on the router.
[edit]
root@# commit
13. Optionally, configure additional properties by adding the necessary configuration
statements. Then, commit the changes to activate them on the router.
[edit]
root@host-name# commit
14. When you have finished configuring the router, exit configuration mode.
[edit]
root@host-name# exit
root@host-name>
The commands in Steps 5 through 12 connect the router to the network but do not enable it
to forward traffic. For complete information about the commands to issue in Step 13,
including examples, see the JUNOS Internet software configuration guides.
Install the Router and Configure Software
129
Configure the JUNOS Internet Software
130
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Part
3
Hardware Maintenance and Replacement Procedures
„ Hardware Maintenance Overview on page 133
„ Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies on page 135
„ Maintain and Replace Cooling System Components on page 153
„ Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 161
„ Maintain and Replace Routing Engine Components on page 173
„ Maintain and Replace Cables and Connectors on page 181
131
132
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
9
Hardware Maintenance Overview
This chapter discusses the following procedures for maintaining the router:
„ Routine Maintenance Procedures on page 133
„ Replacing FRUs on page 133
For information about returning a part to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement, see
“Return the Router or Its Components” on page 215.
Routine Maintenance Procedures
For optimum router performance, perform the following preventive maintenance procedures
on a regular basis:
„ Inspect the installation site for potential problems caused by moisture, loose wires or
cables, and excessive dust. Make sure that airflow around the router and into the air
intake vent at the bottom of the chassis front is unobstructed.
„ Check the status-reporting devices on the craft interface: system alarms, LEDs, and LCD.
See “Craft Interface” on page 17.
„ Inspect the air filter at the bottom front of the router, replacing it as needed for optimum
cooling system performance. Do not run the router for more than a few minutes without
the air filter in place. For replacement instructions, see “Maintain and Replace the Air
Filter” on page 154.
Replacing FRUs
When you need to replace a router component, contact your customer support or sales
representative to order the field-replaceable unit (FRU) that contains the part. For
instructions, see “Return the Router or Its Components” on page 215.
The subsequent chapters in this part describe how to replace FRUs. For a list of the FRUs on
the M40 router, see “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 4.
Hardware Maintenance Overview
133
Replacing FRUs
134
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
10
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
This chapter discusses the following topics related to maintaining and replacing the power
supplies:
„ Tools and Parts Required on page 135
„ Maintain the Power Supplies on page 135
„ Replace an AC Power Supply on page 136
„ Disconnect and Connect AC Power on page 140
„ Replace a DC Power Supply on page 141
„ Disconnect and Connect DC Power on page 147
Tools and Parts Required
To replace DC or AC power supplies, you need the following tools and parts:
„ Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
„ ESD grounding wrist strap
„ 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench for tightening nuts to grounding and terminal studs on a
DC power supply; if 7/16-in. tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench
rather than a metric nut driver or wrench
Maintain the Power Supplies
To maintain the power supplies, follow these guidelines:
„ Make sure that the power and ground cables on each DC power supply are arranged so
that they do not obstruct access to the other power supply or to the Routing Engine.
„ Routinely check the LEDs on the power supply faceplate. The green OK LED indicates
that the power supply is functioning normally; the red FAIL LED indicates a power supply
fault. For more information about the power supply LEDs, refer to “Power Supply LEDs”
on page 22.
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
135
Replace an AC Power Supply
„ Issue the following CLI command to check the status of the power supplies. As shown in
the sample output, the value OK in the Status column indicates that the power supply is
operating normally:
user@host> show chassis environment
Class Item
Power Power Supply A
Power Supply B
. . .
Status
OK
OK
Measurement
For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS Internet
Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and
Management.
„ Check the red and yellow alarm LEDs and the LCD on the craft interface. Power supply
failure or removal triggers an alarm that causes one or both of the LEDs to light and an
error message to appear on the LCD. You can display the error messages remotely by
issuing the following CLI command:
user@host> show chassis alarms
For a list of possible alarm messages, see “Hardware and Interface Alarm Messages” on
page 235.
„ Verify that the airflow to each supply is unobstructed.
„ Verify that the power source has the proper current rating and that each power supply is
connected to a separate power source.
„ Verify that the cable or cord connecting the power supply to the external power source is
securely in place and that there is no moisture accumulating near the router.
„ Verify that the cable or cord from the power source to the router is not damaged. If the
insulation is cracked or broken, replace the cable or cord immediately.
„ Verify that the power cables or cord do not touch or obstruct access to other router
components, and that they do not drape where people could trip on them.
Replace an AC Power Supply
An AC-powered router has two load-sharing, redundant AC power supplies. Each power
supply is hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)”
on page 4. When one power supply fails or is powered down, the other power supply
automatically assumes the entire electrical load for the router.
To replace an AC power supply, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove an AC Power Supply on page 137
„ Install an AC Power Supply on page 138
136
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace an AC Power Supply
Remove an AC Power Supply
The AC power supplies are located at the bottom rear of the chassis (see Figure 2). Each AC
power supply weighs approximately 20 lb (9 kg).
Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a
short time while the router is operational. The power
supply must remain in the chassis for proper airflow.
To remove an AC power supply, follow this procedure (see Figure 53):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Press the power switch on the power supply faceplate to the OFF (O) position.
If you are not removing the power supply, but simply
powering it off, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it
back on. If you need to power it off again, wait for at least
60 seconds after powering it on.
3.
Unplug the power cord from the appliance inlet on the faceplate.
4.
Loosen the thumbscrew at each upper corner of the power supply faceplate, using a
Phillips screwdriver if necessary.
5.
Lift and hold up the safety interlock lever, which is directly below the appliance inlet.
6.
While holding the safety interlock lever up, turn the extractor/inserter counterclockwise
until the power supply disengages from the backplane.
7.
Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to slide the unit about
halfway out of the chassis.
8.
Place one hand under the power supply to support it, then slide it completely out of the
chassis.
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
137
Replace an AC Power Supply
Figure 53: Remove an AC Power Supply
Captive screw
Extractor/inserter
1018
Safety
interlock lever
Install an AC Power Supply
To install an AC power supply, follow this procedure:
138
1.
Verify that the switch on the power supply faceplate is in the OFF (O) position.
2.
Locate the power cord shipped with the router, which should be appropriate for your
geographical location (see “AC Power Cord Specifications” on page 45).
3.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
4.
Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate with one hand and place the other hand
under the unit to support it.
5.
With a finger of the hand that is grasping the handle, lift and hold up the safety interlock
lever, which is just below the appliance inlet.
6.
While holding the safety interlock lever up, slide the power supply into the chassis until
it contacts the backplane.
7.
Still holding the safety interlock lever up, turn the extractor/inserter clockwise until the
power supply engages with the connectors on the backplane.
8.
Push the safety interlock lever down.
9.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten (but do not overtighten) the thumbscrew at each
upper corner of the power supply faceplate.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace an AC Power Supply
10. Insert the appliance coupler end of the power cord into the appliance inlet on the power
supply faceplate and insert the plug into an AC power source receptacle. Verify that the
power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people could
trip on it.
11. Press the power switch on the power supply to the ON ( | ) position. Verify that the green
LED labeled OK on the power supply faceplate eventually lights steadily.
After a power supply is turned on, it can take up to 60
seconds for status indicators—such as LEDs on the power
supply, show chassis commands, and messages on the
craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
during the first 60 seconds.
If the router is completely powered down when you power
on the power supply, the Routing Engine boots as the
power supply completes its startup sequence. If the
Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power
down the router again, first issue the CLI
request system halt command. For complete instructions,
see “Disconnect AC Power from the Router” on page 140.
If after powering on the power supply you must power it
off, wait at least 60 seconds. After powering off a power
supply, wait 60 seconds before turning it back on.
Figure 54: Install an AC Power Supply
Captive
screw
Extractor/inserter
1035
Safety interlock lever
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
139
Disconnect and Connect AC Power
Disconnect and Connect AC Power
The power cord that plugs into the appliance inlet on the faceplate of each AC power supply
provides direct connection to the external power source. See the following sections:
„ Disconnect AC Power from the Router on page 140
„ Connect AC Power to the Router on page 140
Disconnect AC Power from the Router
To disconnect AC power from the router, follow this procedure:
1.
On the console or other management device connected to the Routing Engine, enter CLI
operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software.
For more information, see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command
Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
user@host> request system halt
Wait to continue until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating
system has halted.
2.
Press the power switch on both power supply faceplates to the OFF (O) position.
3.
Unplug the power cord from both power supplies.
When both AC power supplies are installed in the chassis,
both power cords (one for each power supply) must be
unplugged to disconnect power completely.
Connect AC Power to the Router
140
1.
Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis, that the thumbscrews and
extractor/inserters on their faceplates are tightened, and that the power switches on
both faceplates are in the OFF (0) position.
2.
For both power supplies, verify that the ends of the power cord are firmly plugged into
the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate and the external power source
receptacle.
3.
Turn on the power to the management device that is connected to the Routing Engine
through the craft interface port labeled CONSOLE, AUXILIARY, or MANAGEMENT ETHERNET.
For more information on connecting management devices, see “Connect the Router to
Management and Alarm Devices” on page 119.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace a DC Power Supply
4.
Press the power switch on the faceplate of one power supply to the ON ( | ) position. The
green OK LED on the power supply faceplate blinks rapidly for a short time, then lights
steadily.
After a power supply is turned on, it can take up to 60
seconds for status indicators—such as LEDs on the power
supply, show chassis commands, and messages on the
craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
during the first 60 seconds.
The Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes
its startup sequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting
and you need to power down the router again, first issue
the CLI request system halt command. For complete
instructions, see “Disconnect AC Power from the Router”
on page 140.
If after powering on the power supply you must power it
off, wait at least 60 seconds. After powering off a power
supply, wait 60 seconds before turning it back on.
5.
Press the second power switch to the ON ( | ) position and observe the LEDs on the
second power supply faceplate. They should light as described in Step 4.
If the LEDs are not lit in the appropriate pattern after 60 seconds, repeat the power
supply installation procedures described in “Install an AC Power Supply” on page 138,
and the previous steps in this procedure.
6.
On the management device, monitor the startup process to verify that the system has
booted properly.
Replace a DC Power Supply
A DC-powered router has two load-sharing, redundant DC power supplies. Each power supply
is hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on
page 4. When one power supply fails or is powered down, the other power supply
automatically assumes the entire electrical load for the router.
To replace a DC power supply, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove a DC Power Supply on page 142
„ Install a DC Power Supply on page 144
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
141
Replace a DC Power Supply
Remove a DC Power Supply
The DC power supplies are located at the bottom rear of the chassis (see Figure 2). Each DC
power supply weighs approximately 20 lb (9 kg).
Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a
short time while the router is operational. The power
supply must remain in the chassis for proper airflow.
To remove a DC power supply, follow this procedure:
1.
Turn off the power flowing from the DC power source to the power supply. Ensure that
the voltage across the leads of the DC power cables that you are disconnecting is 0 V and
that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active during removal.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Flip the power switch on the power supply faceplate to the OFF (O) position. See
Figure 55
If you are not removing the power supply, but simply
powering it off, wait at least 60 seconds before turning it
back on. If you need to power it off again, wait for at least
60 seconds after powering it on.
Figure 55: Flip the Power Switch on a DC Power Supply to the OFF Position
Power switch
142
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
1128
.
Replace a DC Power Supply
4.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the screws securing the protective shield over the
power terminal studs and remove the shield. See Figure 56.
Figure 56: Remove the Protective Shield from the Terminal Studs
.
Protective
shield
1130
Washer
5.
Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, loosen the nuts that secure the power cable lugs to
the terminal studs. Remove the nuts, washers, and lug from each set of terminal studs.
See Figure 57.
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that
does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in.
tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
6.
Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, loosen the nuts that secure the grounding cable
lug to the grounding studs. Remove the nuts, washers, and lug from the grounding studs.
Figure 57: Remove Cables from a DC Power Supply
.
Locking
washers
Cable lug
Terminal studs
Input
Return
1131
Nuts
Grounding studs
7.
Loosen the thumbscrew at each upper corner of the power supply faceplate, using a
Phillips screwdriver if necessary.
8.
Lift and hold up the safety interlock lever, which is just below the power switch.
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
143
Replace a DC Power Supply
9.
While holding the safety interlock lever up, turn the extractor/inserter counterclockwise
until the power supply disengages from the backplane. See Figure 58.
10. Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to slide the unit about
halfway out of the chassis.
11. Place one hand under the power supply to support it, then slide it completely out of the
chassis.
1129
Figure 58: Remove a DC Power Supply
Install a DC Power Supply
To install a DC power supply, follow this procedure:
144
1.
Verify that the power from the DC power source is shut off. Ensure that the voltage
across the leads of the DC power cables that you are connecting is 0 V and that there is
no chance that the cable leads might become active during connection.
2.
Verify that the power switch on the power supply faceplate is in the OFF (O) position.
3.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
4.
Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate with one hand and place the other hand
under the unit to support it.
5.
With a finger of the hand that is grasping the handle, lift and hold up the safety interlock
lever, which is just below the power switch.
6.
While holding the safety interlock lever up, slide the power supply into the chassis until
it contacts the backplane.
7.
Still holding the safety interlock lever up, turn the extractor/inserter clockwise until the
power supply engages with the connectors on the backplane. See Figure 59.
8.
Push the safety interlock lever down.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace a DC Power Supply
9.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten (but do not overtighten) the thumbscrew at each
upper corner of the power supply faceplate.
1132
Figure 59: Install a DC Power Supply
10. Slide the grounding cable lug onto the grounding studs at the lower right corner of the
power supply faceplate. Secure the lug, first with locking washers, then with nuts. Using
a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, tighten the nuts.
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that
does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in.
tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
11. If the protective shield is installed over the power supply terminals, use a Phillips
screwdriver to loosen and remove the screws that secure the shield to the power supply
(see Figure 60).
Figure 60: Remove the Protective Shield from the Terminal Studs
.
Protective
shield
1130
Washer
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
145
Replace a DC Power Supply
12. Slide the power cable lugs onto the terminal studs on the power supply faceplate (see
Figure 61):
„ Connect the positive (+) source cable lug to the return terminal, which is labeled
RTN.
„ Connect the negative (–) source cable lug to the input terminal, which is labeled
–48V.
Run the power cables to the left on the left power supply, and to the right on the right
power supply. This arrangement enables you to replace a power supply without having
to detach the cables from the other power supply.
There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The
color coding used by the external DC power source at your
site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
cables that attach to the circuit breaker box. You must
ensure that the connections at the circuit breaker box
maintain the proper polarity. The power source DC cables
might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.
Figure 61: Attach Cables to a DC Power Supply
.
Locking
washers
Cable lug
Terminal studs
Input
Return
1131
Nuts
Grounding studs
13. Secure the cable lug to the terminal studs, first with locking washers, then nuts. Using a
7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, tighten the nuts.
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that
does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in.
tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
14. Verify that the power cabling from the source DC breaker to the power supply is correct.
146
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Disconnect and Connect DC Power
15. Reinstall the protective shield covering the terminal studs.
16. Press the power switch on the power supply to the ON ( | ) position. Verify that the green
LED labeled OK on the power supply faceplate eventually lights steadily.
After a power supply is turned on, it can take up to 60
seconds for status indicators—such as LEDs on the power
supply, show chassis commands, and messages on the
craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
during the first 60 seconds.
If the router is completely powered down when you power
on the power supply, the Routing Engine boots as the
power supply completes its startup sequence. If the
Routing Engine finishes booting and you need to power
down the router again, first issue the CLI
request system halt command. For complete instructions,
see “Disconnect DC Power from the Router” on page 147.
If after powering on the power supply you must power it
off, wait at least 60 seconds. After powering off a power
supply, wait 60 seconds before turning it back on.
Disconnect and Connect DC Power
On a DC-powered router, the power cables from the external DC power sources connect to
terminal studs on each power supply. To disconnect or connect power to the router, perform
the following procedures:
„ Disconnect DC Power from the Router on page 147
„ Connect DC Power to the Router on page 149
Disconnect DC Power from the Router
To disconnect DC power from the router, follow this procedure:
1.
On the console or other management device connected to the Routing Engine, enter CLI
operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software.
For more information, see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command
Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
user@host> request system halt
Wait to continue until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating
system has halted.
2.
Turn off the power flowing from each DC power source to a power supply. Ensure that
the voltage across the leads of the DC power cables is 0 V and that there is no chance
that they might become active during removal.
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
147
Disconnect and Connect DC Power
3.
Flip the power switch on both power supplies to the OFF (O) position. See Figure 62.
Figure 62: Flip the Power Switch on a DC Power Supply to the OFF Position
.
1128
Power switch
4.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen and remove the screws securing the protective shield
over the terminal studs on one power supply. Remove the shield.
5.
Using a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, loosen the nuts securing the cable lugs to the
terminal studs on the power supply, then remove the nut and washer from each terminal
stud (see Figure 63).
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that
does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in.
tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
6.
Remove the cable lugs from the terminal studs.
Figure 63: Remove Cables from a DC Power Supply
.
Locking
washers
Cable lug
Terminal studs
Input
Return
1131
Nuts
Grounding studs
7.
148
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
If you are decommissioning the router, loosen and remove the nuts and washers that
secure the grounding lug to the power supply and remove the grounding lug.
Disconnect and Connect DC Power
8.
If not immediately attaching replacement cables, replace the protective shield over the
terminal studs and tighten the screws that secure it to the box.
9.
Verify that the removed cables are not touching or blocking access to any router
components.
10. Repeats Steps 4 through 9 for the other power supply.
Connect DC Power to the Router
Connect DC power to the router by attaching power cables from external DC power sources
to the terminal studs on the power supplies. Power and grounding cables are not supplied
with the router. For information about the required cable type, see “DC Power and Grounding
Cable Specifications” on page 46.
The router must be connected to two separate external DC
power sources, one for each set of terminal studs on the
circuit breaker box.
There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The
color coding used by the external DC power source at your
site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
cables that attach to the circuit breaker box. You must
ensure that the connections at the circuit breaker box
maintain the proper polarity. The power source DC cables
might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.
To connect DC power to the router, follow this procedure:
1.
Ensure that the voltage across the leads of the DC power source cables that you are
connecting is 0 V and that there is no chance that the cable leads might become active
during installation.
2.
Verify that the power supplies are fully inserted in the chassis, that the thumbscrews and
extractor/inserters on their faceplates are tightened, and that the power switches on
both faceplates are in the OFF (0) position. See Figure 64.
3.
Attach the grounding cable to a proper earth ground, if it is not already.
4.
Slide the grounding cable lug onto the grounding studs at the lower right corner of the
power supply faceplate. Secure the lug, first with locking washers, then with nuts. Using
a 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench, tighten the nuts.
Do not substitute a metric nut driver or wrench. A tool that
does not fit the nuts exactly can damage them. If a 7/16-in.
tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench.
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
149
Disconnect and Connect DC Power
Figure 64: Power Switch on a DC Power Supply in the OFF Position
.
5.
1128a
Power switch
If the protective shield is installed over the power supply terminals, use a Phillips
screwdriver to loosen and remove the screws that secure the shield to the power supply
(see Figure 65).
Figure 65: Remove the Protective Shield from the Terminal Studs
.
Protective
shield
1130
Washer
6.
Slide the power cable lugs onto the terminal studs on the power supply faceplate (see
Figure 66):
„ Connect the positive (+) source cable lug to the return terminal, which is labeled
RTN.
„ Connect the negative (–) source cable lug to the input terminal, which is labeled
–48V.
Run the power cables to the left on the left power supply, and to the right on the right
power supply. This arrangement enables you to replace a power supply without having
to detach the cables from the other power supply.
There is no standard color coding for DC power cables. The
color coding used by the external DC power source at your
site determines the color coding for the leads on the power
cables that attach to the circuit breaker box. You must
ensure that the connections at the circuit breaker box
maintain the proper polarity. The power source DC cables
might be labeled (+) and (–) to indicate their polarity.
150
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Disconnect and Connect DC Power
Figure 66: Attach Cables to a DC Power Supply
.
Locking
washers
Cable lug
Terminal studs
Input
Return
1131
Nuts
Grounding studs
7.
Secure the cable lugs to the terminal studs, first with locking washers, then nuts.
8.
Verify that the DC power source wiring from the source DC breaker to the power supply
is correct.
9.
Reinstall the protective shield covering the terminal studs.
10. Repeat Steps 4 through 9 for the other power supply.
11. Turn on the power to the management device that is connected to the Routing Engine
through the craft interface port labeled CONSOLE, AUXILIARY, or MANAGEMENT ETHERNET.
For more information on connecting management devices, see “Connect the Router to
Management and Alarm Devices” on page 119.
12. Press the power switch on the power supply to the ON ( | ) position. Verify that the green
LED labeled OK on the power supply faceplate eventually lights steadily.
After a power supply is turned on, it can take up to 60
seconds for status indicators—such as LEDs on the power
supply, show chassis commands, and messages on the
craft interface LCD—to indicate that the power supply is
functioning normally. Ignore error indicators that appear
during the first 60 seconds.
The Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes
its startup sequence. If the Routing Engine finishes booting
and you need to power down the router again, first issue
the CLI request system halt command. For complete
instructions, see “Disconnect DC Power from the Router”
on page 147.
If after powering on the power supply you must power it
off, wait at least 60 seconds. After powering off a power
supply, wait 60 seconds before turning it back on.
Maintain and Replace the Power Supplies
151
Disconnect and Connect DC Power
13. Press the power switch on other power supply to the ON ( | ) position and confirm that
the OK LED lights as described in Step 4. If the LED is not lit after 60 seconds, repeat the
power supply installation procedures described in “Install a DC Power Supply” on
page 144 and the previous steps in this procedure.
14. On the management device, monitor the startup process to verify that the system has
booted properly.
152
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
11
Maintain and Replace Cooling System Components
his chapter describes how to maintain and replace cooling system components:
„ Tools and Parts Required on page 153
„ Maintain and Replace the Air Filter on page 154
„ Maintain and Replace the Fan Tray on page 155
„ Maintain the Impeller Assemblies on page 157
„ Replace the Lower Impeller Assembly on page 158
„ Replace the Upper Impeller Assembly on page 159
Tools and Parts Required
You need the following tools and parts to replace cooling system components:
„ Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
„ ESD grounding wrist strap
„ Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat for each component removed
Maintain and Replace Cooling System Components
153
Maintain and Replace the Air Filter
Maintain and Replace the Air Filter
Check the air filter regularly for dust and debris, replacing it as necessary. The air filter is
hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on
page 4. Take note of the following caution, however.
Do not operate the router for more than a few minutes
when the air filter has been removed. The fans and
impellers are powerful enough to draw in foreign material,
such as bits of wire, through the unfiltered air intake, which
could damage router components.
See the following sections:
„ Remove the Air Filter on page 154
„ Install the Air Filter on page 155
Remove the Air Filter
The air filter is located below the craft interface at the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). The
air filter weighs less than 0.5 lb (0.2 kg), and you must remove it in order to remove the lower
impeller assembly.
To remove the air filter, use the following procedure (see Figure 67):
1.
Attach an ESD wrist strap to your bare wrist, and connect the wrist strap to one of the
two ESD points on the chassis.
2.
Grasp the sides of the air filter and firmly pull it out from the chassis.
Figure 67: Remove the Air Filter
1039
Craft interface display
154
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Maintain and Replace the Fan Tray
Install the Air Filter
To install the air filter, follow this procedure (see Figure 68):
1.
Attach an ESD wrist strap to your bare wrist, and connect the wrist strap to one of the
two ESD points on the chassis.
2.
Grasp the sides of the air filter and push it firmly over the air intake, inserting its metal
prongs into the chassis.
1064
Figure 68: Install the Air Filter
Maintain and Replace the Fan Tray
The fan tray is located at the rear of the chassis, beneath the upper impeller assembly (see
Figure 2). To check the status of the fans in the fan tray, issue the show chassis environment
command. The output refers to the individual fans in the fan tray as the Rear Left Fan,
Rear Center Fan, and Rear Right Fan:
user@host> show chassis environment
Class Item
. . .
Fans Top Impeller
Bottom Impeller
Rear Left Fan
Rear Center Fan
Rear Right Fan
. . .
Status
Measurement
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Spinning
Spinning
Spinning
Spinning
Spinning
at
at
at
at
at
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
speed
speed
speed
speed
speed
For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS Internet Software
Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
To replace the fan tray, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove the Fan Tray on page 156
„ Install the Fan Tray on page 156
Maintain and Replace Cooling System Components
155
Maintain and Replace the Fan Tray
Remove the Fan Tray
The fan tray is located at the rear of the chassis, beneath the upper impeller assembly (see
Figure 2). On some M40 routers, the tray is covered by a protective screen. You do not need
to remove the screen before removing the fan tray from the chassis. The fan tray weighs
approximately 5 lb (2 kg).
To remove the fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 69):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Unscrew the screws at the outer corners of the fan tray (not the screws that attach the
protective screen), using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.
3.
Grasp the sides of the fan tray and pull firmly to slide it out of the chassis.
1040
Figure 69: Remove the Fan Tray
Install the Fan Tray
To install the fan tray, follow this procedure (see Figure 70):
156
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Slide the fan tray into the chassis.
3.
Align the screws at the corners of the fan tray with the mounting holes at the edges of
the opening and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Maintain the Impeller Assemblies
1053
Figure 70: Install the Fan Tray
Maintain the Impeller Assemblies
The router has two non-interchangeable impeller assemblies. The lower impeller is located
behind the craft interface at the front the chassis (see Figure 1), and the upper assembly is
located above the fan tray at the rear of the chassis (see Figure 2). They work together to cool
the Packet Forwarding Engine components.
During normal operation, the impellers run at less than full speed. The following conditions
automatically cause the impellers to run at full speed and trigger the indicated alarm:
„ One of the impellers fails (red alarm).
„ One of the impellers is removed (yellow alarm). For removal instructions, see the
following sections:
„
Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly on page 158
„
Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly on page 159
„ The router temperature exceeds the “temperature warm” threshold (yellow alarm).
„ The temperature of the router exceeds the maximum (“temperature hot”) threshold (red
alarm and automatic shutdown of the power supplies).
For more information about impeller-related alarms, see “Hardware and Interface Alarm
Messages” on page 192.
To check the status of the impeller assemblies, issue the show chassis environment command.
The output refers to the Top and Bottom impellers, as shown in this example:
user@host> show chassis environment
Class Item
...
Fans Top Impeller
Bottom impeller
...
Status
Measurement
OK
OK
Spinning at normal speed
Spinning at normal speed
For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS Internet Software
Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
Maintain and Replace Cooling System Components
157
Replace the Lower Impeller Assembly
Replace the Lower Impeller Assembly
The lower impeller assembly is located behind the craft interface at the front the chassis (see
Figure 1) and works together with the upper assembly to cool the Packet Forwarding Engine
components. It is hot-removable and hot-insertable.
To replace the fan tray, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly on page 158
„ Install the Lower Impeller Assembly on page 159
Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly
The lower impeller assembly is located behind the craft interface at the front the chassis (see
Figure 1). It weighs approximately 9 lb (4 kg).
To remove the lower impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 71):
1.
Remove the air filter, if it is installed on the chassis. For instructions, see “Remove the
Air Filter” on page 154.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Unscrew the three screws at the bottom edge of the assembly, using a Phillips
screwdriver if necessary.
4.
Grasp the sides of the assembly, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis.
5.
Move one of your hands underneath the assembly to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
Figure 71: Remove the Lower Impeller Assembly
Impellers
Craft interface display
1023
Screws
158
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace the Upper Impeller Assembly
Install the Lower Impeller Assembly
The lower impeller assembly is located behind the craft interface at the front the chassis (see
Figure 1). To install it, follow this procedure (see Figure 72):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Grasp the sides of the assembly, and align the rear with the slide guides in the chassis.
3.
Slide the assembly all the way into the chassis until it contacts the backplane.
4.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the three captive screws at the bottom edge of the
assembly to seat it firmly in the chassis.
5.
Install the air filter as described in “Install the Air Filter” on page 155.
Figure 72: Install the Lower Impeller Assembly
1062
Screws
Replace the Upper Impeller Assembly
The upper impeller assembly is located at the top rear of the chassis, above the fan tray (see
Figure 2), and works together with the lower assembly to cool the Packet Forwarding Engine
components. It is hot-removable and hot-insertable.
To replace the upper impeller assembly, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly on page 159
„ Install the Upper Impeller Assembly on page 160
Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly
The upper impeller assembly is located at the top rear of the chassis, above the fan tray (see
Figure 2). It weighs approximately 10 lb (4 kg).
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Unscrew the captive screws at the bottom corners of the assembly, using a Phillips
screwdriver if necessary.
Maintain and Replace Cooling System Components
159
Replace the Upper Impeller Assembly
3.
Grasp the handle at the top of the assembly, and slide it about halfway out of the chassis.
4.
Move one of your hands underneath the assembly to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
1021
Figure 73: Remove the Upper Impeller Assembly
Install the Upper Impeller Assembly
To install the upper impeller assembly, follow this procedure (see Figure 74):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Grasp the handle at the top of the assembly and slide the assembly all the way into the
chassis.
3.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrews at the lower corners of the
assembly.
1054
Figure 74: Install the Upper Impeller Assembly
160
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
12
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components
This chapter discusses the following topics about maintaining and replacing Packet
Forwarding Engine components:
„ Tools and Parts Required on page 161
„ Maintain FPCs and PICs on page 162
„ Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC on page 163
„ Replace a PIC on page 167
„ Maintain the SCB on page 169
„ Replace the SCB on page 169
Tools and Parts Required
You need the following the tools and parts to replace Packet Forwarding Engine components:
„ Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
„ Electrostatic bags or antistatic mats, one for each component removed
„ ESD grounding wrist strap
„ Replacement components or blank panels for each component removed
„ Rubber safety caps to cover each transceiver on a PIC that connects to fiber-optic cable
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components
161
Maintain FPCs and PICs
Maintain FPCs and PICs
The router can have up to eight Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) mounted vertically in the
FPC card cage at the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). To maintain FPCs and the Physical
Interface Cards (PICs) housed in them, perform the following procedures on a regular basis:
„ Check the LCD on the craft interface and the LEDs on the craft interface directly below
each FPC slot. The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when an FPC is functioning
normally. For more information, see “FPC LEDs and Offline Button” on page 18.
„ Check the LEDs on PIC faceplates. Most PIC faceplates have an LED labeled STATUS.
Some PICs have additional LEDs, often one per port. The meaning of the LED states
differs for various PICs. For more information, see the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC
Guide. If the FPC that houses the PIC detects a PIC failure, the FPC informs the SCB,
which in turn sends an alarm to the Routing Engine.
„ Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed FPCs. As shown
in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates that the FPC
is functioning normally:
user@host> show chassis fpc
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
State
Online
Online
Online
Empty
Empty
Online
Online
Online
Temp
(C)
28
27
29
25
29
26
CPU Utilization (%)
Total Interrupt
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Memory
Utilization (%)
DRAM (MB) Heap
Buffer
8
9
15
8
9
15
8
12
14
8
8
8
8
9
8
14
14
13
For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example also specifies a
slot number (0), which is optional:
user@host> show chassis fpc detail 0
Slot 0 information:
State
Logical slot
0
Temperature
28
Total CPU DRAM
8
Total SRAM
1
Total SDRAM
128
Total notification SDRAM
24
I/O Manager ASIC information
Start time:
Uptime:
Online
degrees C / 82 degrees F
MB
MB
MB
MB
Version 1.1, Foundry IBM, Part number 0
2003-05-23 18:14:31 PDT
34 days, 6 hours, 9 minutes, 5 seconds
„ To check the status of a PIC, issue the CLI show chassis fpc pic-status command. The
following example specifies an FPC slot number (5), which is optional. The PIC slots in
an FPC are numbered from 0 (zero) through 3, top to bottom:
user@host> show chassis fpc pic–status 5
Slot 5 Online
PIC 0
1x
PIC 1
1x
PIC 2
1x
PIC 3
1x
162
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
OC-12 SONET, SMIR
OC-12 ATM, MM
OC-12 SONET, SMIR
Tunnel
Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC
For further description of the output from the commands, see the JUNOS Internet Software
Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC
FPCs and quad-wide PICs are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in
“Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 4. When you remove one of them, forwarding
operations halt for about 200 ms while the Packet Forwarding Engine flushes the shared
memory buffers on the remaining FPCs and quad-wide PICs.
To replace an FPC or quad-wide PIC, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove an FPC or Quad-wide PIC on page 163
„ Install an FPC or Quad-wide PIC on page 165
Remove an FPC or Quad-wide PIC
The router can have up to eight FPCs or quad-wide PICs mounted vertically in the FPC card
cage on the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). An FPC that houses four PICs weighs about
3 lb (1.5 kg).
To remove an FPC or quad-wide PIC, follow this procedure (for brevity, the instructions refer
to FPCs only):
1.
Place an antistatic mat or electrostatic bag on a flat, stable surface to receive the FPC. If
any of the PICs on the FPC use fiber-optic cable, also have ready a rubber safety cap for
each transceiver and cable.
If you are removing PICs from the FPC, use a foam antistatic mat instead. If a foam mat
is not available, substitute a standard flat antistatic mat but use extra care when laying
the FPC component side down on it, to avoid damaging the electrical components.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Label the cables connected to each PIC on the FPC so that you can reconnect the cables
to the correct PICs.
4.
Take the FPC offline by pressing and holding its offline button for 5 seconds or until the
red FAIL LED next to the button goes out. The offline button for each FPC is located just
below it on the craft interface (see Figure 75).
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components
163
Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC
Figure 75: Remove an FPC
Extractor clip
Thumbscrew
FPC
1060a
LEDs and offline
button
5.
Disconnect the cables from the PICs on the FPC. If a PIC uses fiber-optic cable,
immediately cover each transceiver and the end of each cable with a rubber safety cap.
Carefully thread each disconnected cable through the hooks in the cable management
system, to prevent the cables from developing stress points.
Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or
into the transceivers on the PIC faceplate. Single-mode
fiber-optic cable and the PICs that use it (such as ATM and
SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light that can damage
your eyes.
Do not leave a transceiver uncovered except when
removing or inserting the cable. The safety cap keeps the
port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
6.
Unscrew the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC, using a Phillips screwdriver if
necessary.
7.
Pull the ends of the extractor clips, which are adjacent to the thumbscrews, outward
toward the ends of the FPC (see Figure 75).
8.
Grasp the FPC with both hands and slide it about halfway out of the chassis.
9.
Place one hand underneath the FPC to support it, and slide it completely out of the
chassis. Set the FPC on the antistatic foam mat prepared in Step 1.
To avoid damaging any components, use extra care when
laying the FPC on the antistatic mat, particularly if the mat
is not made of foam.
Do not stack the FPC on top of or under any other
component.
164
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC
10. If you are removing or replacing PICs on the FPC, see “Replace a PIC” on page 167.
11. If you are not immediately reinstalling an FPC into the slot, cover the slot with a blank
panel so that cooling air can circulate properly through the FPC card cage.
Install an FPC or Quad-wide PIC
To install an FPC or quad-wide PIC, follow this procedure (for brevity, the instructions refer to
FPCs only):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Install or remove PICs as desired by following the instructions in“Replace a PIC” on
page 167. You must install or remove PICs before installing the FPC into the chassis. If
any PICs use fiber-optic cable, make sure that each transceiver is covered with a rubber
safety cap.
3.
Verify that the ends of the extractor clips are pointing outward toward the ends of the
FPC.
4.
Grasp the front of the FPC with both hands and align the rear with the guides at the sides
of the FPC slot in the chassis.
5.
Slide the FPC straight into the card cage until it contacts the backplane.
When about 1 in. (2.5 cm) of the FPC remains outside the
slot, adjust the insertion speed so that it takes between 1
and 15 seconds for the FPC to contact the backplane.
Completing the insertion too quickly or too slowly can
cause the router to reset.
6.
Push the ends of the extractor clips, located at each end of the FPC, inward toward the
center of the FPC (see Figure 76).
7.
Tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the FPC.
8.
If any of the PICs on the FPC use fiber-optic cable, remove the rubber safety cap from
each transceiver and the end of each cable.
Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or
into the transceivers on the PIC faceplate. Single-mode
fiber-optic cable and the PICs that use it (such as ATM and
SONET/SDH interfaces) emit laser light that can damage
your eyes.
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components
165
Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC
9.
Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connector ports on each PIC on the FPC.
Secure the cables so that they are not supporting their own weight. Place excess cable
out of the way in a neatly coiled loop, using the cable management system. Placing
fasteners on a loop helps to maintain its shape.
Do not let cable hang free from the connector. Do not
allow fastened loops of cable to dangle from the ladder
rack, because this stresses the cable at the fastening point.
Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend
radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can
damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to
diagnose.
10. Press and hold the FPC offline button on the craft interface.
The green LED labeled OK blinks for about 5 seconds while the Routing Engine
downloads the FPC software, the FPC runs its diagnostics, and the PICs housed in the
FPC are enabled. Router forwarding operations then halt for about 200 ms while the
Packet Forwarding Engine incorporates the memory on the new FPC into the memory
buffers shared by all FPCs. When the FPC is online, the OK LED lights steadily and you
can release the offline button.
You can also verify correct PIC and FPC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc
commands described in “Maintain FPCs and PICs” on page 162.
11. If you are installing multiple FPCs, repeat Steps 2 through 10 for each one. Wait
30 seconds after installing each FPC to allow the FPC and PICs to come online.
Figure 76: Install an FPC
Extractor clip
Thumbscrew
FPC
1060
LEDs and offline
button
166
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace a PIC
Replace a PIC
PICs are housed in the FPCs installed in the front of the router, as shown in Figure 4.
Quad-wide PICs, such as the OC-48/STM-16 SONET/SDH PIC, occupy an entire FPC slot and
are hot-removable and hot-insertable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on
page 4. For replacement instructions, see “Replace an FPC or Quad-wide PIC” on page 163.
A regular PIC, which installs into a four-slot FPC card carrier, is hot-removable and
hot-insertable in the sense that removing it does not disrupt routing functions; however, you
must completely remove its host FPC from the chassis before removing the PIC, which
affects all PICs on the FPC.
To replace a PIC, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove a PIC on page 167
„ Install a PIC on page 168
Remove a PIC
To remove a PIC from an FPC, follow this procedure (see Figure 77):
1.
Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the PIC.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Follow the instructions in “Remove an FPC or Quad-wide PIC” on page 163 to remove
the PIC’s host FPC from the chassis. Lay the FPC on an antistatic foam mat on a flat,
stable surface. If a foam mat is not available, substitute a standard flat antistatic mat but
use extra care when laying the FPC component side down on it, to avoid damaging the
electrical components.
4.
With the FPC lying component side down and the PIC faceplates facing you, use a
Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two screws that secure the PIC to the FPC.
5.
Carefully turn over the FPC and lay it on the mat component side up with the PIC
faceplates facing you.
6.
Pull the PIC straight out of the FPC slot.
You might need to rock the PIC back and forth to loosen it
from the connector in the FPC slot. To avoid bending the
pins on the connector, use the smallest and gentlest
motion possible.
7.
Place the PIC in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat prepared in Step 1.
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components
167
Replace a PIC
g003121
Figure 77: Remove a PIC
Install a PIC
To install a PIC, follow this procedure (see Figure 78):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Place the FPC into which you are installing the PIC on an antistatic foam mat,
component side up and with its faceplate facing you. If a foam mat is not available,
substitute a standard flat antistatic mat but use extra care when laying the FPC on it to
avoid damaging the electrical components.
3.
Push the PIC part way into the FPC slot. Carefully align the tabs on the PIC connector
with the notches in the connector at the rear of the FPC slot. Push the PIC in until the
connectors join.
If the pins on the FPC connector are not aligned properly
with the holes in the PIC connector, the pins might be bent
or the holes damaged. Either kind of damage can prevent
the PIC and FPC from functioning correctly.
168
4.
Carefully turn over the FPC and lay it component side down on the mat with the PIC
faceplates facing you.
5.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the two screws that secure the PIC in the FPC.
6.
Using a screwdriver, tighten the two screws on the noncomponent side that fasten each
PIC to the FPC.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Maintain the SCB
1007
Figure 78: Install a PIC
Maintain the SCB
The System Control Board (SCB) occupies the center slot of the card cage, installing into the
backplane from the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). To maintain the SCB, follow these
guidelines:
„ Check the LEDs on the SCB faceplate. The green LEDs labeled ACTIVE and RUN blink
periodically when it is functioning normally. For more information, see “SCB
Components” on page 13.
„ Issue the CLI show chassis scb command to check the status of the SCB. As shown in the
sample output, the Uptime field reports how long the SCB has been functioning:
user@host> show chassis scb
SCB status:
Temperature
CPU utilization
Interrupt utilization
Heap utilization
Buffer utilization
Total CPU DRAM
Internet Processor II
Start time:
Uptime:
26
2
0
16
44
64
degrees C / 78 degrees F
percent
percent
percent
percent
MB
Version 1, Foundry IBM, Part number 9
2003-05-22 11:43:46 PDT
4 days, 4 hours, 11 minutes, 15 seconds
For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS Internet Software
Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
Replace the SCB
The SCB is hot-pluggable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on page 4. When
the SCB fails or is removed from the chassis, forwarding halts until it is replaced and
functioning again.
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components
169
Replace the SCB
To replace the SCB, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove the SCB on page 170
„ Install the SCB on page 171
Remove the SCB
The SCB is located at the center of the card cage, at the front of the chassis (see Figure 1). It
weighs approximately 1 lb (0.5 kg).
To remove the SCB, follow this procedure (see Figure 79):
1.
Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the SCB.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Unscrew the thumbscrew at each end of the SCB, using a Phillips screwdriver if
necessary.
4.
Pull the ends of the extractor clips (which are adjacent to the thumbscrews) outward,
toward the ends of the SCB.
5.
Grasp both sides of the SCB and slide it about halfway out of the chassis.
6.
Place one hand under the SCB to support it, slide it completely out of the chassis, and
place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag prepared in Step 1.
Figure 79: Remove the SCB
Extractor clip
1052
Thumbscrew
170
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace the SCB
Install the SCB
To install the SCB, follow this procedure (see Figure 80):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Verify that the ends of the extractor clips are pointing outward toward the ends of the
SCB.
3.
Grasp the front of the SCB with both hands and align the rear of the card carrier with the
slide guides in the card cage.
4.
Slide the SCB all the way into the card cage until it contacts the backplane.
5.
Push the ends of the extractor clips (which are located at each end of the SCB) towards
each other to secure the SCB in the chassis.
6.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the thumbscrew at each end of the SCB to seat the
unit firmly in the chassis.
7.
Verify that the green LEDs labeled ACTIVE and RUN blink periodically on the SCB
faceplate. You can also verify SCB functioning by issuing the show chassis scb
command, as described in “Maintain the SCB” on page 169.
Figure 80: Install the SCB
Extractor clip
1049
Thumbscrew
Maintain and Replace Packet Forwarding Engine Components
171
Replace the SCB
172
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
13
Maintain and Replace Routing Engine Components
This chapter discusses the following topics about maintaining and replacing Routing Engine
components:
„ Tools and Parts Required on page 173
„ Maintain the Routing Engine on page 174
„ Replace the Routing Engine Housing on page 174
„ Replace the Routing Engine on page 176
„ Replace the LS-120 Drive on page 180
Tools and Parts Required
To replace Routing Engine components, you need the following the tools and parts:
„ Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
„ Electrostatic bags or antistatic mats, one for each component removed
„ ESD grounding wrist strap
„ Replacement components or blank panels, one for each component that you are
removing
Maintain and Replace Routing Engine Components
173
Maintain the Routing Engine
Maintain the Routing Engine
To maintain the Routing Engine, perform the following procedures on a regular basis:
„ Check the LCD and the Routing Engine LEDs on the craft interface. The LCD reports
Routing Engine status during normal operation and describes the cause of failures when
they occur. The green LED labeled OK lights steadily when the Routing Engine is
functioning normally. For more information about the LEDs and LCD, see “Craft
Interface” on page 17.
„ Issue the CLI show chassis routing-engine command to check the status of the Routing
Engine:
user@host> show chassis routing-engine
Routing Engine status:
Temperature
DRAM
Memory utilization
CPU utilization:
User
Background
Kernel
Interrupt
Idle
Model
Start time
Uptime
Load averages:
25 degrees C / 77 degrees F
256 MB
32 percent
0
0
0
0
99
percent
percent
percent
percent
percent
RE-1.0
2003-05-22 11:40:03 PDT
21 hours, 15 minutes, 39 seconds
1 minute
5 minute 15 minute
0.00
0.00
0.00
For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS Internet Software
Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
Replace the Routing Engine Housing
The Routing Engine resides in a metal housing in the rear of the chassis, below the fan tray
(see Figure 2). The housing is not a FRU, but you must remove it from the chassis to access
the Routing Engine and LS-120 drive. The Routing Engine housing weighs approximately
17 lb (8 kg).
To remove and install the Routing Engine housing, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove the Routing Engine Housing on page 175
„ Install the Routing Engine Housing on page 175
174
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace the Routing Engine Housing
Remove the Routing Engine Housing
To remove the Routing Engine housing, use the following procedure (see Figure 81):
1.
On the console or other management device connected to the Routing Engine, enter CLI
operational mode and issue the following command. The command shuts down the
Routing Engine cleanly, so that its state information is preserved:
user@host> request system halt
Wait to continue until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating
system has halted.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Unscrew the screws along the left and right edges of the Routing Engine housing (six in
all), using a Phillips screwdriver if necessary.
4.
Grasp the handles located at either side of the Routing Engine housing, and slide the unit
about halfway out of the chassis.
5.
Move one of your hands underneath the housing to support it, and slide it completely
out of the chassis.
Figure 81: Remove the Routing Engine Housing
Mounting screws
1019
Mounting screws
Install the Routing Engine Housing
To return the Routing Engine housing to the chassis, follow this procedure (see Figure 82):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Place one hand underneath the unit to support it and grasp a handle on the front of the
unit with the other hand.
Maintain and Replace Routing Engine Components
175
Replace the Routing Engine
3.
Align the rear of the unit with the slide guides in the chassis.
4.
Slide the unit completely into the chassis.
5.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws along the left and right edges of the
Routing Engine housing (six in all).
1055
Figure 82: Install the Routing Engine Housing
Replace the Routing Engine
The Routing Engine is hot-pluggable, as described in “Field-Replaceable Units (FRUs)” on
page 4. When it fails or is removed from the chassis, forwarding halts until it is replaced and
functioning again.
To replace the Routing Engine, perform the following procedures:
„ Remove the Routing Engine on page 177
„ Install the Routing Engine on page 178
The appearance and position of electronic components or
the PC card slot on your Routing Engine might differ from
the figures in this section. These differences do not affect
Routing Engine installation and removal or functionality.
176
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace the Routing Engine
Remove the Routing Engine
The Routing Engine is housed in the Routing Engine housing. It weighs approximately 1.5 lb
(0.7 kg).
To remove the Routing Engine, follow this procedure:
1.
Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat, stable surface to receive the Routing
Engine.
2.
Attach an ESD wrist strap to your bare wrist and connect the wrist strap to one of the
two ESD points on the chassis.
3.
Remove the Routing Engine housing from the chassis, if it is not already. For
instructions, see “Remove the Routing Engine Housing” on page 175.
4.
If screws are installed in the extractor clips located at each end of the Routing Engine
faceplate, use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen them until the Routing Engine is no longer
seated in the housing.
5.
Using your thumbs, push and hold the red tab on each extractor clip toward the outer
edge of the unit. Push the ends of the extractor clips outward (see Figure 83).
6.
Grasp the extractor clips and slide the unit about halfway out of the chassis.
Be careful to slide the Routing Engine straight out of the
chassis. Damage can result if it gets lodged because of
uneven movement.
7.
Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it. Slide it completely out of the
chassis, and place it on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag prepared in Step 1.
Maintain and Replace Routing Engine Components
177
Replace the Routing Engine
Figure 83: Remove the Routing Engine
RST
IDE
JUNOS PC CARD
LABEL THIS WAY
1004
PC CARD
Install the Routing Engine
To install the Routing Engine in the Routing Engine housing, follow this procedure (see
Figure 82):
1.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
2.
Verify that the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine is flipped toward the
outer edge of the unit. If necessary, use your thumbs to push and hold the red tab on
each extractor clip toward the outer edge, then push the ends of the extractor clips
outward.
3.
Place one hand under the Routing Engine to support it and grasp one of the extractor
clips on the faceplate with the other hand.
4.
Align the rear of the Routing Engine with the guide rails in the Routing Engine housing
and slide it in completely. See Figure 84.
Be careful to align the Routing Engine correctly with the
guide rails and push it in evenly. Damage can result if it
gets lodged because of uneven movement.
178
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace the Routing Engine
5.
Press the extractor clip at each end of the Routing Engine inward to seat the unit firmly
in the chassis.
6.
If screws are installed in the extractor clips, use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten them.
7.
Return the Routing Engine housing to the chassis. For instructions, see “Install the
Routing Engine Housing” on page 175.
8.
After the Routing Engine restarts, check the Routing Engine LEDs on the craft interface
to verify that the green LED labeled OK is lit (see Figure 7).
You can also verify correct Routing Engine functioning by issuing the
show chassis routing-engine command described in “Maintain the Routing Engine” on
page 174.
Figure 84: Install the Routing Engine
RST
IDE
JUNOS PC CARD
LABEL THIS WAY
1030
PC CARD
Maintain and Replace Routing Engine Components
179
Replace the LS-120 Drive
Replace the LS-120 Drive
To replace the LS-120 drive, use the following procedure (see Figure 85). You can perform this
procedure without powering down the router.
1.
Remove the Routing Engine housing from the chassis, if it is not already. For
instructions, see “Remove the Routing Engine Housing” on page 175.
2.
Attach an ESD strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to one of the ESD points on
the chassis.
3.
Locate the LS-120 drive module inside the Routing Engine housing. The drive resides in
a metal housing in front of an equally sized hard drive.
4.
Detach the exposed power connector plug and the Routing Engine connector from the
top of the drive. You might need a small pair of pliers to grip the Routing Engine
connector.
5.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, unscrew the screws on the metal housing (three on each
side).
6.
Slide the LS-120 drive out of its bay.
7.
Slide the replacement LS-120 drive into the empty bay.
8.
Reattach the power connector and the Routing Engine connector.
9.
Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten the screws along both sides of the metal housing.
10. Return the Routing Engine housing to the chassis. For instructions, see “Install the
Routing Engine Housing” on page 175.
1071
Figure 85: Remove the LS-120 Drive from the Routing Engine Housing
180
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
14
Maintain and Replace Cables and Connectors
This chapter describes how to maintain and replace cables and connectors:
„ Tools and Parts Required on page 181
„ Cable Specifications on page 182
„ Maintain PIC Cables on page 182
„ Replace PIC Cables on page 183
„ Replace Power Supply Cables on page 185
„ Replace Cables and Wire Connecting to Routing Engine Interface Ports on page 186
Tools and Parts Required
To replace network and power cords, cables, and wiring, you need the following tools and
parts:
„ Phillips (+) screwdrivers, numbers 1 and 2
„ Phillips (+) screwdriver, 2.5 mm (for alarm relay contacts)
„ Flat-blade (–) screwdriver, 2.5 mm (for serial cable connector)
„ ESD grounding wrist strap
„ Wire cutters
„ 7/16-in. nut driver or wrench for tightening nuts to terminal studs on a DC power supply;
if 7/16-in. tool is not available, use pliers or an adjustable wrench rather than a metric
nut driver or wrench
„ Rubber safety cap to cover the PIC cable connector for each PIC fiber-optic cable
removed
Maintain and Replace Cables and Connectors
181
Cable Specifications
Cable Specifications
See the following sections for specifications for the indicated type of cable. For information
about the cable used by the PICs supported on the M40 router, see the M20 and M40 Internet
Routers PIC Guide.
„ AC Power Cord Specifications on page 45
„ DC Power and Grounding Cable Specifications on page 46
„ Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications on page 53
Maintain PIC Cables
To maintain PIC cables, follow these guidelines:
„ Use the cable management system (shown in Figure 1) to support cables and prevent
cables from dislodging or developing stress points.
„ Place excess cable out of the way in the cable management system. Do not allow
fastened loops of cable to dangle from the connector because this stresses the cable at
the fastening point. Putting fasteners on the loops help to maintain their shape.
„ Keep the cable connections clean and free of dust and other particles, which can cause
drops in the received power level. Always inspect cables and clean them if necessary
before connecting an interface.
„ Label all PIC cables to identify them, labeling each end of the cable the same.
The following guidelines apply specifically to fiber-optic cable:
„ When you unplug a fiber-optic cable from a PIC, always place a rubber safety plug over
the transceiver on the PIC faceplate.
„ Keep fiber-optic cable connections clean using an appropriate fiber-cleaning device,
such as RIFOCS 945/946 Fiber Optic Connector Cleaning System. See “Fiber-Optic
Connector Cleaning” on page 213.
„ Anchor fiber-optic cable to avoid stress on the connectors. When attaching fiber to a PIC,
be sure to secure the fiber so it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor.
Never let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.
„ Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its bend radius. An arc smaller than a few inches
can damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
„ Frequent plugging and unplugging of fiber-optic cable into and out of optical
instruments, such as ATM or SONET/SDH analyzers, can cause damage to the
instruments that is expensive to repair. Instead, attach a short fiber extension to the
optical equipment. Any wear and tear due to frequent plugging and unplugging is then
absorbed by the short fiber extension, which is easy and inexpensive to replace.
182
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace PIC Cables
Replace PIC Cables
Removing and installing PIC cables does not affect router function, except that the PIC does
not receive or transmit data while the cable is disconnected. To replace a PIC cable, perform
the following procedures:
„ Remove a PIC Cable on page 183
„ Install a PIC Cable on page 184
Remove a PIC Cable
To remove a PIC cable, follow this procedure:
1.
If the PIC connects to fiber-optic cable, have ready a rubber safety cap for each cable you
are removing and the transceiver into which it plugs.
2.
Unplug the cable from the cable connector port and immediately place a rubber safety
cap over the port if it connects to fiber-optic cable.
Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or
the transceivers on the faceplate of a PIC that connects to
fiber-optic cable. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the
PICs that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH) emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.
Do not leave a transceiver uncovered except when
removing or inserting the cable. The safety cap keeps the
port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
3.
Carefully thread the cable through the cable management system, to prevent the cable
from dislodging or developing stress points. Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly
coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners on the loop helps to
maintain its shape.
Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend
radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can
damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to
diagnose.
Do not let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.
Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle, which
stresses the cable at the fastening point.
Maintain and Replace Cables and Connectors
183
Replace PIC Cables
Install a PIC Cable
1.
Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIC, as specified in the M20 and
M40 Internet Routers PIC Guide. Figure 86 depicts the connector on fiber-optic cable.
Figure 86: PIC Fiber-Optic Cable Connector
2.
Remove the rubber safety plug from the PIC cable connector port.
Do not look directly into the ends of fiber-optic cables or
the transceivers on the faceplate of a PIC that connects to
fiber-optic cable. Single-mode fiber-optic cable and the
PICs that use it (such as ATM and SONET/SDH) emit laser
light that can damage your eyes.
Do not leave a transceiver uncovered except when
removing or inserting the cable. The safety cap keeps the
port clean and prevents accidental exposure to laser light.
3.
Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIC faceplate (see
Figure 87, which shows a fiber-optic connector).
4.
Carefully thread the cable through in the cable management system, to prevent the
cable from dislodging or developing stress points. Secure the cable so that it is not
supporting its own weight as it hangs from the connector. Place excess cable out of the
way in a neatly coiled loop in the cable management system. Placing fasteners on the
loop helps to maintain its shape.
Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend
radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can
damage the cable and cause problems that are difficult to
diagnose.
Never let fiber-optic cable hang free from the connector.
Do not allow fastened loops of cable to dangle, which
stresses the cable at the fastening point.
5.
Verify that the PIC is functioning correctly by noting whether the normal function
indicator LED is lit. The normal function indicator LED is usually green; for more
information, see the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC Guide.
You can also verify correct PIC functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic-status
command, described in “Maintain FPCs and PICs” on page 162.
184
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace Power Supply Cables
1034
Figure 87: Connect Fiber-Optic Cable to a PIC
Replace Power Supply Cables
For instructions for replacing AC or DC power cables, see “Disconnect and Connect AC
Power” on page 140 and “Disconnect and Connect DC Power” on page 147.
Maintain and Replace Cables and Connectors
185
Replace Cables and Wire Connecting to Routing Engine Interface Ports
Replace Cables and Wire Connecting to Routing Engine Interface Ports
To replace the cables and wires that connect external management devices to the craft
interface (see Figure 88), perform the procedures described in the following sections:
„ Replace the Management Ethernet Cable on page 186
„ Replace the Console or Auxiliary Cable on page 187
„ Replace Alarm Relay Wire on page 188
Figure 88: Routing Engine Interface Ports on the Craft Interface
FAIL
OK
0
NC
C
NO
OK
FAIL
1
RED
ALARM
OK
2
FAIL
OK
3
ALARM
FAIL
OK
4
FAIL
OK
FAIL
OK
5
MENU
FAIL
6
OK
7
ROUTING ENGINE
OK
ALARM
CUTOFF
FAIL
ENTER
YELLOW
ALARM
MANAGEMENT
ETHERNET
CONSOLE
AUXILIARY
1065
NC
C
NO
FAIL
Alarm relay contacts
Routing Engine ports
Replace the Management Ethernet Cable
The cable that plugs into the port labeled MANAGEMENT ETHERNET on the craft interface
connects the Routing Engine to a network for out-of-band management (see Figure 88). The
port accepts a cable with RJ-45/RJ-45 connectors, which is provided with the router as
detailed in “Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire Specifications” on page 53.
To replace the cable connecting to a management network, follow this procedure:
1.
186
If a cable is already installed in the MANAGEMENT ETHERNET port, perform the following
steps:
a.
Press the tab on the connector and pull the connector straight out of the port.
Figure 89 shows the connector.
b.
Repeat to disconnect the cable from the network device.
2.
Plug one end of the replacement Ethernet cable into the MANAGEMENT ETHERNET port.
3.
Plug the other end of the cable into the network device.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Replace Cables and Wire Connecting to Routing Engine Interface Ports
1063
Figure 89: Management Port Ethernet Connector
Replace the Console or Auxiliary Cable
The cable that plugs into the port labeled CONSOLE on the craft interface connects the
Routing Engine to a system console. The cable that plugs into the port labeled AUXILIARY
connects the Routing Engine to a laptop, modem, or other auxiliary device (see Figure 88).
Both ports accept an RS-232 (EIA-232) serial cable with DB-9/DB-9 connectors. One such
cable is provided with the router, as detailed in “Routing Engine Interface Cable and Wire
Specifications” on page 52. If you want to connect devices to both ports, you must supply
another cable.
To replace the cable connecting to a management console or auxiliary device, follow this
procedure:
1.
If a cable is already installed in the CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port, perform the following
steps:
a.
Turn off the power to the console or auxiliary device.
b.
Unscrew the screws that secure the cable connector to the port, using a 2.5-mm
flat-blade screwdriver if necessary. Figure 90 shows the cable connector.
c.
Pull the cable connector straight out of the port.
d.
Disconnect the cable from the console or auxiliary device.
2.
Plug the female end of the replacement serial cable into the CONSOLE or AUXILIARY port
and the other end into the device.
3.
Tighten the screws on the connectors at both ends, using a 2.5-mm flat-blade
screwdriver if necessary.
4.
Power on the auxiliary or console device.
1027
Figure 90: Console and Auxiliary Serial Port Connector
Maintain and Replace Cables and Connectors
187
Replace Cables and Wire Connecting to Routing Engine Interface Ports
Replace Alarm Relay Wire
The alarm relay contacts located on the craft interface to the left of the red and yellow alarm
LEDS connect to external alarm devices that report conditions that trigger a red or yellow
alarm (see Figure 88). The alarm relay contacts accept wire of any gauge between 28-AWG
and 14-AWG (0.09 and 2.09 mm2 ), which is not provided. Use the gauge of wire appropriate
for the external device that you are connecting to the relay contact.
To replace the wires connecting to an alarm-reporting device, follow this procedure:
1.
Prepare the required lengths of replacement wire with gauge between 28-AWG and
14-AWG (0.09 and 2.09 mm2 ).
2.
Disconnect the existing wires at the external device.
3.
Use a 2.5 mm Phillips screwdriver to loosen the small screws on the faceplate of the
appropriate alarm relay contact—the upper contact for a device that reports high priority
(red) alarms, or the lower contact for the device that reports lower priority (yellow)
alarms.
4.
Remove existing wires from the alarm relay contact and insert replacement wires (the
NC label on one contact means “normally closed,” C means “common,” and NO means
“normally open”). Tighten the screws to secure the wire.
5.
188
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Attach the other end of the replacement wires to the external device.
Part
4
Troubleshooting
„ Troubleshooting Overview on page 191
„ Troubleshoot the Power Supplies on page 195
„ Troubleshoot the Cooling System on page 197
„ Troubleshoot the Packet Forwarding Engine Components on page 201
189
190
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
15
Troubleshooting Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the resources you can use while troubleshooting
problems with the router:
„ Command-Line Interface on page 191
„ LEDs on page 192
„ Hardware and Interface Alarm Messages on page 192
„ Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 194
For information about troubleshooting problems with specific hardware
components—including the cooling system, power supplies, and the Packet Forwarding
Engine—see the subsequent chapters in this document. If you encounter problems with
other router components, including the Routing Engine, contact the Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) as described in “Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center” on page 194.
Command-Line Interface
The JUNOS Internet software command-line interface (CLI) is the primary tool for controlling
and troubleshooting router hardware, the JUNOS Internet software, routing protocols, and
network connectivity. CLI commands display information from routing tables, information
specific to routing protocols, and information about network connectivity derived from the
ping and traceroute utilities.
You enter CLI commands on one or more external management devices connected to the
Routing Engine through ports on the craft interface. There is a port labeled CONSOLE for
attaching a system console, a port labeled AUXILIARY for attaching a laptop, modem, or other
auxiliary device, and a port labeled MANAGEMENT ETHERNET for attaching to a management
LAN. For more information, see “Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports” on page 19.
For information about using the CLI to display details about alarms generated by interfaces
and hardware components, see “Hardware and Interface Alarm Messages” on page 192.
Troubleshooting Overview
191
LEDs
LEDs
The LEDs described in the following sections indicate the basic status of hardware
components:
„ LEDs on the Craft Interface on page 192
„ LEDs on Hardware Components on page 192
LEDs on the Craft Interface
The craft interface hosts LEDs and an LCD that provide status and troubleshooting
information at a glance. It is located on the front of the chassis below the FPC card cage (see
Figure 1). The LEDs on the craft interface include the following:
„ Alarm—The circular red alarm LED at the left of the craft interface indicates a critical
condition that can result in a system shutdown. The triangular yellow alarm next to it
indicates a less severe condition that requires monitoring or maintenance. Both alarms
can occur simultaneously. When an alarm LED is lit, the LCD describes the cause of the
alarm. For more information about the alarm LEDs, see “Alarm Relay Contacts, LEDs,
and Cutoff Button” on page 18. For more information about the causes of alarms, see
“Hardware and Interface Alarm Messages” on page 192.
„ FPC—For each of the eight FPC slots in the router, there are two LEDs and an offline
button located on the craft interface directly below the slot. The green LED labeled OK
and red LED labeled FAIL indicate FPC status. For more information, see “FPC LEDs and
Offline Button” on page 18.
„ Routing Engine— LEDs at the right side of the craft interface indicate the status of the
Routing Engine—a green one labeled OK and a red one labeled FAIL. For more
information, see “Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports” on page 19.
LEDs on Hardware Components
LEDs on the faceplates of many hardware components report component status:
„ PIC—Most PICs have an LED labeled STATUS on the PIC faceplate. Some PICs have
additional LEDs, often one per port. The meaning of the LED states differs for various
PICs. For more information, see the M20 and M40 Internet Routers PIC Guide.
„ Power supply—A red FAIL LED and a green OK LED are located on each power supply
faceplate and indicate the status of the power supply. See “Power Supply LEDs” on
page 22.
„ SCB—Four LEDs on the faceplate of the SCB indicate its status. See “SCB Components”
on page 13.
Hardware and Interface Alarm Messages
When the Routing Engine detects an alarm condition, it lights the red or yellow alarm LED on
the craft interface as appropriate, trips the corresponding alarm relay contact on the craft
interface, and reports the cause of the alarm in the craft interface LCD. To view a more
detailed description of the alarm cause, issue the show chassis alarms CLI command:
192
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Hardware and Interface Alarm Messages
user@host> show chassis alarms
There are two classes of alarm messages:
„ Chassis alarms—Indicate a problem with a chassis component such as the cooling
system or power supplies, as described in Table 22. The text in the column labeled
“LCD Message” appears in the LCD. The text in the column labeled “CLI Message”
appears in the output from the show chassis alarms command.
„ Interface alarms—Indicate a problem with a specific network interface, as described in
Table 23.
Table 22: Chassis Alarm Messages
Component
LCD Message
CLI Message
Fans
fan-name FAIL
fan-name stopped spinning
fan-name RMVD
fan-name removed
Too few fans
Too few fans installed or working
temperature-sensor FAIL
temperature-sensor temperature sensor failed
System too warm
A temperature sensor exceeds 54 degrees C
Temperature sensors
Power supplies
FPCs
Craft Interface
Supply x FAIL
Power supply x not providing power
Supply x 3V FAIL
Power supply x 3.3V failed
Supply x 5V FAIL
Power supply x 5V failed
Supply x 2V FAIL
Power supply x 2.5V failed
Slot x: errors
Too many unrecoverable errors
Slot x: errors
Too many recoverable errors
Craft IF FAIL
Craft interface not responding
Troubleshooting Overview
193
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center
Table 23: SONET Interface Alarm Messages
LCD Message
CLI Message
interface-name so-x/x/x LOL
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of light
interface-name so-x/x/x PLL
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET PLL lock
interface-name so-x/x/x LOF
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of frame
interface-name so-x/x/x LOS
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of signal
interface-name so-x/x/x SEF
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET severely errored frame
interface-name so-x/x/x LAIS
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET line AIS
interface-name so-x/x/x PAIS
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET path AIS
interface-name so-x/x/x LOP
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET loss of pointer
interface-name so-x/x/x BERR-SD
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET bit error rate defect
interface-name so-x/x/x BERR-SF
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET bit error rate fault
interface-name so-x/x/x LRDI
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET line remote defect indicator
interface-name so-x/x/x PRDI
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET path remote defect indicator
interface-name so-x/x/x REI
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET remote error indicator
interface-name so-x/x/x UNEQ
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET unequipped
interface-name so-x/x/x PMIS
interface-name so-x/x/x - SONET path mismatch
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center
If you need assistance during troubleshooting, you can contact the Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC) by e-mail at support@juniper.net or by telephone at
1-888-314-JTAC (within the United States) or (+1) 408-745-9500 (from outside the United
States).
194
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
16
Troubleshoot the Power Supplies
When a power supply is functioning correctly, the green LED labeled OK is lit steadily and the
red LED labeled FAIL is not lit.
If the LEDs are in any other states, consult the following sections:
„ All LEDs on Both Supplies are Off on page 195
„ All LEDs on One Supply are Off or LED States are not Correct on page 195
All LEDs on Both Supplies are Off
If all LEDs are off on both power supply faceplates, either someone has switched off power to
the router or the system temperature has exceeded the acceptable maximum. In the latter
case, the Routing Engine shuts down both power supplies. There is no power to the router, so
the alarm LEDs on the craft interface are not lit.
Excessive system temperature is almost always caused by excessive environmental
temperature. Correct the environmental temperature before powering the router on again.
All LEDs on One Supply are Off or LED States are not Correct
If either of the following conditions apply, perform the diagnostic procedure that follows:
„ The LEDs on one power supply are all off, but the LEDs on the other supply indicate that
it is functioning properly.
„ The LED states on one or both supplies indicate a problem: the green LED labeled OK is
not lit and the red LED labeled FAIL is lit.
Troubleshoot the Power Supplies
195
All LEDs on One Supply are Off or LED States are not Correct
Perform the following steps to diagnose and correct the problem:
1.
Check the red alarm LED on the craft interface:
„ If it is lit, issue the following CLI command for more information about the source of
an alarm condition:
user@host> show chassis alarms
For a list of messages that can appear, see “Hardware and Interface Alarm
Messages” on page 192.
A common cause of power supply shutdown is that the temperature of the power
supply or another router component has exceed the maximum temperature.
„ If the red alarm LED is not lit, check that the power switch is in the ON ( | ) position
on the power supply faceplate.
2.
Replace the faulty power supply with a spare. For instructions, see “Replace an AC Power
Supply” on page 136 and “Replace a DC Power Supply” on page 141. If the LEDs light
correctly on the spare, the original power supply is faulty. Return it to Juniper Networks
for replacement, as described in “Return the Router or Its Components” on page 215.
3.
If the spare power supply also does not work, connect the router to a different power
source. You might also try replacing the power cord (on an AC-powered router) or power
cable (on a DC-powered router). For instructions, see “Disconnect and Connect AC
Power” on page 140 and “Disconnect and Connect DC Power” on page 147.
If you cannot determine the cause of the problem or need additional assistance, see “Juniper
Networks Technical Assistance Center” on page 194.
196
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
17
Troubleshoot the Cooling System
The router’s cooling system comprises two separate subsystems:
„ Upper and lower impeller assemblies—Cool the Packet Forwarding Engine components
(backplane, SCB, FPCs, and PICs). The lower impeller assembly is located behind the
craft interface at the front the chassis (see Figure 1), and the upper assembly is located
above the fan tray at the rear of the chassis (see Figure 2). Each assembly houses two
impellers for redundancy. The assemblies are not interchangeable.
„ Fan tray—Cools the Routing Engine and backplane. The tray houses three fans for
redundancy and is located above the Routing Engine at the upper rear of the chassis (see
Figure 2).
The cooling system draws in room air through the air intake vent located at the front of the
chassis below the craft interface. After entering the chassis, the air stream separates into
separate flows for the front and rear subsystems, and the temperature of each flow is
monitored independently. For a graphic depiction of the airflow, see Figure 10.
For the cooling system to function properly, the clearance around the chassis must be
sufficient for unobstructed airflow. See “Clearance Requirements for Airflow and Hardware
Maintenance” on page 42.
During normal operation, the impellers and fans in the fan tray function at less than full
speed. Sensors on the backplane and router components constantly monitor their
temperature, and the speed of the fans and impellers is adjusted as necessary. If the router
temperature exceeds the acceptable maximum, the JUNOS software shuts down the router
by turning off the power supplies.
To troubleshoot the cooling subsystems, follow these procedures:
„ Troubleshoot the Fan Tray and Impeller Assemblies on page 198
„ Troubleshoot the Power Supply Fans on page 199
Troubleshoot the Cooling System
197
Troubleshoot the Fan Tray and Impeller Assemblies
Troubleshoot the Fan Tray and Impeller Assemblies
To troubleshoot the fan tray and impeller assemblies, follow these guidelines:
„ If the red alarm LED on the craft interface lights, check the LCD on the craft interface for
the source of the problem. The display reports the number of alarm conditions and the
source of each alarm. For a list of messages, see “Hardware and Interface Alarm
Messages” on page 192.
„ Issue the following CLI command for more information about the source of an alarm
condition:
user@host> show chassis alarms
„ Issue the following command to check the status of the fans and impellers:
„ To check the status of the impellers and fans, issue the show chassis environment
command. The output refers to the Top and Bottom impellers and to the individual fans
in the fan tray as the Rear Left Fan, Rear Center Fan, and Rear Right Fan:
user@host> show chassis environment
Class Item
Fans Top Impeller
Bottom Impeller
Rear Left Fan
Rear Center Fan
Rear Right Fan
Status
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Measurement
Spinning at
Spinning at
Spinning at
Spinning at
Spinning at
normal
normal
normal
normal
normal
speed
speed
speed
speed
speed
For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS Internet
Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and
Management.
„ Place your hand near the exhaust at the upper rear of the chassis to determine whether
the impellers and fans are expelling air.
„ If both power supplies have failed, the system temperature might have exceeded the
threshold, causing the system to shut down. See “All LEDs on Both Supplies are Off” on
page 205.
„ If the LCD on the craft interface reports failure of only one impeller and the other
impellers are functioning normally, the impeller is probably faulty and needs to be
replaced. For replacement instructions, see “Maintain and Replace Cooling System
Components” on page 153. For instructions about returning a faulty component to
Juniper Networks, see “Return the Router or Its Components” on page 215.
„ If one of the fan assemblies fails, look at the fan to determine whether the blades of the
fan are rotating. Individual blades are not distinguishable when the fan is rotating at
normal speeds.
198
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Troubleshoot the Power Supply Fans
Troubleshoot the Power Supply Fans
Two LEDs on each power supply faceplate report power supply status: a green LED labeled
OK and a red LED labeled FAIL. In addition, a fail condition triggers the red alarm LED on the
craft interface.
Issue the following CLI command to check the status of the power supplies and their fans. As
shown in the sample output, the value OK in the Status column indicates that the power
supply is operating normally:
user@host> show chassis environment
Class Item
Power Power Supply A
Power Supply B
Status
OK
OK
Measurement
For further description of the output from the command, see the JUNOS Internet
Software Operational Mode Command Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and
Management.
Troubleshoot the Cooling System
199
Troubleshoot the Power Supply Fans
200
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Chapter
18
Troubleshoot the Packet Forwarding Engine Components
This chapter discusses the following topics related to troubleshooting components of the
Packet Forwarding Engine:
„ Troubleshoot FPCs on page 201
„ Troubleshoot PICs on page 202
„ Troubleshoot the SCB on page 202
Troubleshoot FPCs
As soon as an FPC is seated on an operating router, the Routing Engine downloads the FPC
software to it. The FPC then runs diagnostics and enables the PICs that it houses. During this
time, the green FPC LED labeled OK on the craft interface is blinking. When the FPC is online
and functioning normally, the OK LED lights steadily.
To troubleshoot FPCs, follow these guidelines:
„ If the red FPC LED labeled FAIL lights steadily, make sure the FPC is properly seated in
the backplane—use a Phillips screwdriver to check that the screws at the top and bottom
of the card carrier are tight.
„ Issue the CLI show chassis fpc command to check the status of installed FPCs. As shown
in the sample output, the value Online in the column labeled State indicates that the FPC
is functioning normally:
user@host> show chassis fpc
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
State
Online
Online
Online
Empty
Empty
Online
Online
Online
Temp
(C)
28
27
29
25
29
26
CPU Utilization (%)
Total Interrupt
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Memory
Utilization (%)
DRAM (MB) Heap
Buffer
8
9
15
8
9
15
8
12
14
8
8
8
8
9
8
14
14
13
Troubleshoot the Packet Forwarding Engine Components
201
Troubleshoot PICs
For more detailed output, add the detail option. The following example also specifies a
slot number (0), which is optional:
user@host> show chassis fpc detail 0
Slot 0 information:
State
Logical slot
0
Temperature
28
Total CPU DRAM
8
Total SRAM
1
Total SDRAM
128
Total notification SDRAM
24
I/O Manager ASIC information
Start time:
Uptime:
Online
degrees C / 82 degrees F
MB
MB
MB
MB
Version 1.1, Foundry IBM, Part number 0
2003-05-23 18:14:31 PDT
34 days, 6 hours, 9 minutes, 5 seconds
Troubleshoot PICs
To troubleshoot PICs, follow these guidelines:
„ To check the status of each port on a PIC, look at the LED located on the PIC faceplate.
For information about the meaning of LED states on different PICs, see the M20 and M40
Internet Routers PIC Guide.
„ To check the status of a PIC, issue the following CLI command. The following example
specifies an FPC slot number (3), which is optional. The PIC slots in the FPC are
numbered from 0 (zero) through 3, top to bottom:
user@host> show chassis fpc pic–status 3
Slot 3 Online
PIC 0
4x
PIC 1
4x
PIC 2
1x
PIC 3
1x
OC-3 SONET, MM
OC-3 SONET, SMIR
OC-12 SONET, SMIR
G/E, 1000 BASE-SX
Troubleshoot the SCB
To troubleshoot the SCB, follow these guidelines:
„ Periodically check the alarm LEDs and the LCD on the craft interface. If the SCB is not
functioning properly, it might send spurious error messages to the Routing Engine
(indicating incorrectly that system components are malfunctioning, for example). These
messages can appear on the LCD.
„ If all four LEDs on the SCB faceplate are on, but dimly lit, the SCB is probably not seated
properly. Tighten the captive screws at the top and bottom of the SCB card carrier. For
more information about the LEDs, see “SCB Components” on page 13.
202
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Troubleshoot the SCB
„ If the green RUN LED on the SCB is not blinking, the SCB processor is not functioning
normally. The SCB might not be connected properly to the backplane. Try tightening the
screws at the top and bottom of the SCB card carrier. If that does not work, try
reinstalling the SCB.
„ When the Routing Engine is removed, the SCB enters a warm shutdown mode and
continues forwarding data for a limited time using a frozen forwarding table. (The default
time limit is determined by a timer in the SCB.) If the Routing Engine is replaced during
the warm shutdown period, the SCB unfreezes its forwarding tables and resumes normal
functioning. Otherwise, the SCB shuts itself down after the time limit expires.
Troubleshoot the Packet Forwarding Engine Components
203
Troubleshoot the SCB
204
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Part
5
Appendixes
„ Cable Connectors and Pinouts on page 207
„ Fiber-Optic Connector Cleaning on page 213
„ Return the Router or Its Components on page 215
„ Glossary on page 223
205
206
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Appendix
A
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
This chapter contains tables that list the pinouts for the following cable connectors
on the router:
„ RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Ethernet Management Port on page 207
„ DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Ports on page 208
„ E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts on page 208
„ Fast Ethernet 12-port Cable Pinouts on page 211
RJ-45 Connector Pinouts for the Ethernet Management Port
The port on the craft interface labeled MANAGEMENT ETHERNET is an autosensing
10/100-Mbps Ethernet RJ-45 receptacle that accepts an Ethernet cable for connecting the
Routing Engine to a management LAN (or other device that supports out-of-band
management). For more information, see “Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports” on
page 19. Table 24 describes the RJ-45 connector pinout.
Table 24: RJ-45 Connector Pinout
Pin
Signal
1
TX+
2
TX-
3
RX+
4
Termination network
5
Termination network
6
RX-
7
Termination network
8
Termination network
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
207
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
DB-9 Connector Pinouts for the Routing Engine Console and Auxiliary Ports
The ports on the craft interface labeled AUXILIARY and CONSOLE are DB-9 receptacles that
accept RS-232 (EIA-232) cable. The AUXILIARY port connects the Routing Engine to a laptop,
modem, or other auxiliary unit, and the CONSOLE port connects it to a management console.
The ports are configured as data terminal equipment (DTE). For more information, see
“Routing Engine LEDs and Interface Ports” on page 19. Table 25 describes the DB-9
connector pinouts.
Table 25: DB-9 Connector Pinout
Pin
Signal
Direction
Description
1
DCD
<–
Carrier Detect
2
RxD
<–
Receive Data
3
TxD
–>
Transmit Data
4
DTR
–>
Data Terminal Ready
5
Ground
—
Signal Ground
6
DSR
<–
Data Set Ready
7
RTS
–>
Ready to Send
8
CTS
<–
Clear to Send
9
RING
<–
Ring Indicator
E1 and T1 RJ-48 Cable Pinouts
The E1 and T1 PICs use an RJ-48 cable, which is not supplied with the PIC.
To maintain agency approvals, use only a properly
constructed, shielded cable.
The following tables describe the RJ-48 connector pinouts:
„ Table 26, “RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Straight) Pinout“ on page 209
„ Table 27, “RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Crossover) Pinout“ on page 209
„ Table 28, “RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Straight) Pinout“ on page 210
„ Table 29, “RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Crossover) Pinout“ on page 210
208
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
Table 26: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Straight) Pinout
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIC)
(Data numbering form)
RJ-48 Pin
(Data numbering form)
Signal
1
1
RX, Ring, –
2
2
RX, Tip, +
4
4
TX, Ring, –
5
5
TX, Tip, +
3
3
Shield/Return/Ground
6
6
Shield/Return/Ground
7
No connect
No connect
8
No connect
No connect
9
No connect
No connect
10
No connect
No connect
11
No connect
No connect
12
No connect
No connect
13
No connect
No connect
14
No connect
No connect
15
No connect
No connect
Table 27: RJ-48 Connector to RJ-48 Connector (Crossover) Pinout
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIC)
(Data numbering form)
RJ-48 Pin
(Data numbering form)
Signal
1
4
RX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–
2
5
RX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+
4
1
TX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–
5
2
TX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+
3
3
Shield/Return/Ground
6
6
Shield/Return/Ground
7
No connect
No connect
8
No connect
No connect
9
No connect
No connect
10
No connect
No connect
11
No connect
No connect
12
No connect
No connect
13
No connect
No connect
14
No connect
No connect
15
No connect
No connect
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
209
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
Table 28: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Straight) Pinout
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIC)
(Data numbering form)
DB-15 Pin
(Data numbering form)
Signal
1
11
RX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–
2
3
RX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+
4
9
TX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–
5
1
TX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+
3
4
Shield/Return/Ground
6
2
Shield/Return/Ground
7
No connect
No connect
8
No connect
No connect
9
No connect
No connect
10
No connect
No connect
11
No connect
No connect
12
No connect
No connect
13
No connect
No connect
14
No connect
No connect
15
No connect
No connect
Table 29: RJ-48 Connector to DB-15 Connector (Crossover) Pinout
210
RJ-48 Pin (on T1/E1 PIC)
(Data numbering form)
DB-15 Pin
(Data numbering form)
Signal
1
9
RX/Ring/– <––>TX/Ring/–
2
1
RX/Tip/+ <––>TX/Tip/+
4
11
TX/Ring/– <––>RX/Ring/–
5
3
TX/Tip/+ <––>RX/Tip/+
3
4
Shield/Return/Ground
6
2
Shield/Return/Ground
7
No connect
No connect
8
No connect
No connect
9
No connect
No connect
10
No connect
No connect
11
No connect
No connect
12
No connect
No connect
13
No connect
No connect
14
No connect
No connect
15
No connect
No connect
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
Fast Ethernet 12-port Cable Pinouts
The Fast Ethernet 12-port PIC has one VHDCI connector port on its faceplate (see Figure 91),
which accepts the RJ-21 cable supplied with the PIC (see Figure 92).
Figure 91: Fast Ethernet 12-port PIC
Ethernet 10
/100 BASE
-TX
1801
STATUS
1480
Figure 92: VHDCI to RJ-21 Cable
Table 30 describes the RJ-21 cable pinouts.
RJ-21 pin numbers 25 and 50 do not appear in the table
because they are ground connectors.
Table 30: RJ-21 Pin Assignments
Ethernet Port Numbers
RJ-21 Pin Assignment
TX -
TX +
RX -
RX +
0
2
27
1
26
1
4
29
3
28
2
6
31
5
30
3
8
33
7
32
4
10
35
9
34
5
12
37
11
36
6
14
39
13
38
7
16
41
15
40
8
18
43
17
42
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
211
Cable Connectors and Pinouts
212
Ethernet Port Numbers
RJ-21 Pin Assignment
9
20
45
19
44
10
22
47
21
46
11
24
49
23
48
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Appendix
B
Fiber-Optic Connector Cleaning
For proper performance of PICs that use SC fiber-optic cable, you must clean the fiber-optic
transceivers before inserting SC cable.
Because of the high sensitivity of fiber-optic PIC receivers, you must keep the PIC connectors
clean and free of dust. Small micro-deposits of oil and dust in the canal of the SC connector
could cause loss of light, reducing signal power and possibly causing intermittent problems
with the optical connection. Figure 93 shows the oil and dust that collects in the SC
connector canals.
Figure 93: Microdeposits in the SC Connector Canal
Keep the connectors clean using an appropriate fiber-cleaning device, such as RIFOCS Fiber
Optic Adaptor Cleaning Wands (part number 946). Follow the directions for the cleaning kit
you use. Figure 94 shows the proper cleaning procedure.
Figure 94: Clean the Connectors
After you have cleaned the optical transceiver area of the fiber-optic PIC, make sure that the
SC connector tip of the fiber-optic cable is clean.
Fiber-Optic Connector Cleaning
213
Fiber-Optic Connector Cleaning
To clean the fiber-optic cable SC connection, use only an approved alcohol-free fiber-optic
cable cleaning kit such as the Opptex Cletop-S Fiber Cleaner. Follow the directions for the
cleaning kit you use. Figure 95 shows a cable cleaning kit.
Figure 95: Fiber-optic Cable Cleaning Kit
214
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Appendix
C
Return the Router or Its Components
This chapter discusses the following topics related to returning parts for repair or
replacement:
„ Return Procedure on page 215
„ Locate Component Serial Numbers on page 216
„ Pack the Router for Shipment on page 220
„ Pack Components for Shipment on page 221
Return Procedure
When you need to return a component, follow this procedure:
1.
Determine the part number and serial number of the component. For instructions, see
“Locate Component Serial Numbers” on page 216.
2.
Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Juniper Networks
Technical Assistance Center (JTAC). You can send e-mail to support@juniper.net, or call
1-888-314-JTAC (within the United States) or (+1) 408-745-9500 (from outside the
United States).
Provide the following information in your e-mail message or during the telephone call:
„ Part number and serial number of component
„ Your name, organization name, telephone number, and fax number
„ The shipping address for the replacement component, including contact name and
phone number
„ Description of the failure
The support representative validates your request, and issues an RMA number for return
of the component.
3.
Pack the router or component for shipment, performing the procedure described in
“Pack the Router for Shipment” on page 220 or “Pack Components for Shipment” on
page 221.
Return the Router or Its Components
215
Return the Router or Its Components
Locate Component Serial Numbers
Your request for an RMA must include the component part and serial numbers. Issue the CLI
show chassis hardware command to list the numbers for all components installed in the
chassis:
user@host> show chassis hardware
Hardware inventory:
Item
Version
Chassis
Backplane
REV 06
Power Supply A
Rev
Power Supply B
Rev A1
Maxicab
REV 05
Minicab
REV 02
Display
REV 07
Routing Engine
...
Part number
710-000073
740-000234
740-000234
710-000229
710-000482
710-000150
Serial number
00126
AA2097
000001
000132
AA4390
AA4423
AA4352
Description
M40
AC
AC
RE-1.0
Most components also have a small rectangular serial number ID label (see Figure 96)
attached to the component body.
1600
Figure 96: Serial Number ID Label
The following sections describe the tag location on each type of component:
„ FPC Serial Number ID Label on page 217
„ PIC Serial Number ID Label on page 217
„ Power Supply Serial Number ID Label on page 218
„ Routing Engine Serial Number Label on page 218
„ SCB Serial Number ID Label on page 219
216
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Return the Router or Its Components
FPC Serial Number ID Label
The serial number ID label on an FPC is located near the rear on the left side when the FPC is
vertical, as it is when installed in the router (see Figure 97).
Figure 97: FPC Serial Number ID Label
STATUS
RX
1603
TX
LINE
Y
RX ACTIVIT
Serial number
ID label
PIC Serial Number ID Label
The serial number ID label on a PIC is located on the left side when the PIC is vertical, as it is
when installed in the router (see Figure 98).
Serial number
ID label
1604
STM-4/OC-12 ATM SMF IR
Figure 98: PIC Serial Number ID Label
Return the Router or Its Components
217
Return the Router or Its Components
Power Supply Serial Number ID Label
The serial number ID label on a power supply is located on the top (see Figure 99).
Figure 99: Power Supply Serial Number ID Label
1605
Serial number ID label
Routing Engine Serial Number Label
The location of the serial number label depends on the type of Routing Engine (see
Figure 100 and Figure 101). Some Routing Engines might have more than one serial number.
Contact your Juniper support representative if you need assistance in determining which
serial number to provide.
Figure 100: Routing Engine 333 Serial Number ID Label
Serial number ID label
Te k n o r S i l i c o n S e r i a l I D
1607
460000078ba2201
Board S/N: 900106217
218
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Return the Router or Its Components
1576
Figure 101: Routing Engine 600 Serial Number ID Label
*1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 2 *
Serial number ID label
SCB Serial Number ID Label
The serial number ID label on an SCB is located at the center front of the board panel (see
Figure 102).
Figure 102: Serial Number Label on the System Control Board
1602
Serial number
ID label
4.
Return the Router or Its Components
219
Return the Router or Its Components
Pack the Router for Shipment
To pack the router for shipment, follow this procedure:
1.
Retrieve the crate with bottom pallet and packing materials in which the router was
originally shipped.
2.
On the console or other management device connected to the Routing Engine, enter CLI
operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software.
For more information, see the JUNOS Internet Software Operational Mode Command
Reference: Protocols, Class of Service, Chassis, and Management.
user@host> request system halt
Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has
halted.
3.
Shut down power to the router by pressing the power switch on the faceplate of both
power supplies to the OFF (O) position.
4.
Disconnect the power cords or cables. For instructions, see “Disconnect AC Power from
the Router” on page 140 and “Disconnect DC Power from the Router” on page 147.
5.
Remove the cables from all PICs and external management and alarm devices. For
instructions, see “Maintain and Replace Cables and Connectors” on page 181.
6.
Remove the chassis from the rack.
„ If you are using a mechanical lift, place the lift under the chassis, unscrew and
remove the mounting screws from the rack, and move the router to the pallet.
„ If you are moving the router manually, first remove components as described in
“Remove Components from the Chassis” on page 100. Unscrew and remove the
mounting screws from the rack, move the router to the pallet, then reinstall the
components as described in “Reinstall Components into the Chassis” on page 111.
220
7.
Place the chassis on the pallet and bolt it to the pallet.
8.
Replace the packing foam on top of the chassis.
9.
Place the crate cover over the chassis and foam.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Return the Router or Its Components
Pack Components for Shipment
To pack and ship individual router components, follow these guidelines:
„ Protect the component with enough packing material to prevent movement inside the
carton. Use the original shipping materials if they are available.
„ Place individual boards in electrostatic bags.
Do not stack any of the Packet Forwarding Engine
components.
Return the Router or Its Components
221
Return the Router or Its Components
222
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Appendix
D
Glossary
A
AAL
ATM adaptation layer. A series of protocols enabling various types of traffic, including voice,
data, image, and video, to run over an ATM network.
ADM
Add/drop multiplexer. SONET functionality that allows lower-level signals to be dropped from
a high-speed optical connection.
ANSI
American National Standards Institute. The United States’ representative to the ISO.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. Protocol for mapping IP addresses to MAC addresses.
AS
Autonomous system. Set of routers under a single technical administration. Each AS
normally uses a single interior gateway protocol (IGP) and metrics to propagate routing
information within the set of routers. Also called routing domain.
ASIC
Application-specific integrated circuit. Specialized processors that perform specific functions
on the router.
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing and switching method utilizing
fixed-length cells of 53 octets to support multiple types of traffic.
autonomous system
B
See AS.
backplane
Forms the rear of the FPC card cage. Provides data transfer, power distribution, and signal
connectivity.
bandwidth
The range of transmission frequencies a network can use, expressed as the difference
between the highest and lowest frequencies of a transmission channel. In computer
networks, greater bandwidth indicates faster data-transfer rate capacity.
Bellcore
BERT
BGP
bit error rate test
Bell Communications Research. Research and development organization created after the
divestiture of the Bell System. It is supported by the regional Bell holding companies
(RBHCs), which own the regional Bell operating companies (RBOCs).
Bit error rate test. A test that can be run on a T3 interface to determine whether it is
operating properly.
Border Gateway Protocol. Exterior gateway protocol used to exchange routing information
among routers in different autonomous systems.
See BERT.
Glossary
223
Glossary
BITS
Border Gateway
Protocol
broadcast
bundle
C
CE device
CFM
channel service unit
CIDR
class of service
CLEC
CLEI
CLI
community
confederation
constrained path
See BGP.
Operation of sending network traffic from one network node to all other network nodes.
Collection of software that makes up a JUNOS software release.
Customer edge device. Router or switch in the customer's network that is connected to a
service provider's provider edge (PE) router and participates in a Layer 3 VPN.
Cubic feet per minute. Measure of air flow in volume per minute.
See CSU/DSU.
Classless interdomain routing. A method of specifying Internet addresses in which you
explicitly specify the bits of the address to represent the network address instead of
determining this information from the first octet of the address.
See CoS.
(Pronounced “see-lek”) Competitive Local Exchange Carrier. Company that competes with
the already established local telecommunications business by providing its own network and
switching.
Common language equipment identifier. Inventory code used to identify and track
telecommunications equipment.
Command-line interface. Interface provided for configuring and monitoring the routing
protocol software.
In BGP, a group of destinations that share a common property. Community information is
included as one of the path attributes in BGP update messages.
In BGP, a group of systems that appears to external autonomous systems to be a single
autonomous system.
In traffic engineering, a path determined using RSVP signaling and constrained using CSPF.
The ERO carried in the packets contains the constrained path information.
core
The central backbone of the network.
CoS
Class of service. A group of privileges and features assigned to a particular service.
CPE
Customer premises equipment. Telephone or other service provider equipment located at a
customer site.
craft interface
224
Building Integrated Timing Source. Dedicated timing source that synchronizes all equipment
in a particular building.
Mechanisms used by a Communication Workers of America craftsperson to operate,
administer, and maintain equipment or provision data communications. On a Juniper
Networks router, the craft interface allows you to view status and troubleshooting information
and perform system control functions.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Glossary
CSU/DSU
customer edge device
D
daemon
Channel service unit/data service unit. Channel service unit connects a digital phone line to a
multiplexer or other digital signal device. Data service unit connects a DTE to a digital phone
line.
See CE device.
Background process that performs operations on behalf of the system software and
hardware. Daemons normally start when the system software is booted, and they run as long
as the software is running. In the JUNOS software, daemons are also referred to as processes.
data circuit-terminating
equipment
See DCE.
data-link connection
identifier
See DLCI.
data service unit
Data Terminal
Equipment
See CSU/DSU.
See DTE.
dcd
The JUNOS software interface process (daemon).
DCE
Data circuit-terminating equipment. RS-232-C device, typically used for a modem or printer,
or a network access and packet switching node.
default address
denial of service
dense
wavelength-division
multiplexing
DHCP
Dijkstra algorithm
DIMM
direct routes
Router address that is used as the source address on unnumbered interfaces.
See DoS.
See DWDM.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Allocates IP addresses dynamically so that they can be
reused when they are no longer needed.
See SPF.
Dual inline memory module. 168-pin memory module that supports 64-bit data transfer.
See interface routes.
DLCI
Data-link connection identifier. Identifier for a Frame Relay virtual connection (also called a
logical interface).
DoS
Denial of service. System security breach in which network services become unavailable to
users.
DRAM
drop profile
Dynamic random-access memory. Storage source on the router that can be accessed quickly
by a process.
Drop probabilities for different levels of buffer fullness that are used by RED to determine
from which queue to drop packets.
Glossary
225
Glossary
DSU
Data service unit. A device used to connect a DTE to a digital phone line. Converts digital data
from a router to voltages and encoding required by the phone line. See also CSU/DSU.
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment. RS-232-C interface that a computer uses to exchange information
with a serial device.
DVMRP
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. Distributed multicast routing protocol that
dynamically generates IP multicast delivery trees using a technique called reverse path
multicasting (RPM) to forward multicast traffic to downstream interfaces.
DWDM
Dense wavelength-division multiplexing. Technology that enables data from different sources
to be carried together on an optical fiber, with each signal carried on its own separate
wavelength.
Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol
E
ECSA
Exterior gateway protocol, such as BGP.
EIA
Electronic Industries Association. A United States trade group that represents manufacturers
of electronics devices and sets standards and specifications.
EMI
Electromagnetic interference. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or
otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics or electrical equipment.
export
FEAC
Flexible PIC
Concentrator
forwarding information
base
forwarding table
226
Exchange Carriers Standards Association. A standards organization created after the
divestiture of the Bell System to represent the interests of interexchange carriers.
EGP
explicit path
F
See DHCP.
See signaled path.
To place routes from the routing table into a routing protocol.
Far-end alarm and control. T3 signal used to send alarm or status information from the
far-end terminal back to the near-end terminal and to initiate T3 loopbacks at the far-end
terminal from the near-end terminal.
See FPC.
See forwarding table.
JUNOS software forwarding information base (FIB). The JUNOS routing protocol process
installs active routes from its routing tables into the Routing Engine forwarding table. The
kernel copies this forwarding table into the Packet Forwarding Engine, which is responsible
for determining which interface transmits the packets.
FPC
Flexible PIC Concentrator. An interface concentrator on which PICs are mounted. An FPC
inserts into a slot in a Juniper Networks router. See also PIC.
FRU
Field-replaceable unit. Router component that customers can replace onsite.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Glossary
H
HDLC
hold time
host subsystem
I
High-level data link control. An International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standard for a
bit-oriented data link layer protocol on which most other bit-oriented protocols are based.
Maximum number of seconds allowed to elapse between the time a BGP system receives
successive keepalive or update messages from a peer.
Provides routing and system-management functions of the router. Consists of a Routing
Engine and an adjacent Control Board (CB).
IANA
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority. Regulatory group that maintains all assigned and
registered Internet numbers, such as IP and multicast addresses. See also NIC.
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol. Used in router discovery, ICMP allows router
advertisements that enable a host to discover addresses of operating routers on the subnet.
IDE
Integrated Drive Electronics. Type of hard disk on the Routing Engine.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission. See ISO.
IEEE
Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers. International professional society for
electrical engineers.
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force. International community of network designers, operators,
vendors, and researchers concerned with the evolution of the Internet architecture and the
smooth operation of the Internet.
IGMP
Internet Group Membership Protocol. Used with multicast protocols to determine whether
group members are present.
IGP
import
interface routes
IP
Interior gateway protocol, such as IS-IS, OSPF, and RIP.
To install routes from the routing protocols into a routing table.
Routes that are in the routing table because an interface has been configured with an IP
address. Also called direct routes.
Internet Protocol. The protocol used for sending data from one point to another on the
Internet.
IS-IS
Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol. Link-state, interior gateway routing
protocol for IP networks that also uses the shortest-path first (SPF) algorithm to determine
routes.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization. Worldwide federation of standards bodies
that promotes international standardization and publishes international agreements as
International Standards.
ISP
Internet service provider. Company that provides access to the Internet and related services.
ITU
International Telecommunications Union (formerly known as the CCITT). Group supported
by the United Nations that makes recommendations and coordinates the development of
telecommunications standards for the entire world.
Glossary
227
Glossary
J
jitter
K
L
kernel forwarding table
label-switched path
(LSP)
label switching
label-switching router
link
link-state PDU (LSP)
M
See forwarding table.
Sequence of routers that cooperatively perform MPLS operations for a packet stream. The
first router in an LSP is called the ingress router, and the last router in the path is called the
egress router. An LSP is a point-to-point, half-duplex connection from the ingress router to the
egress router. (The ingress and egress routers cannot be the same router.)
See MPLS.
See LSR.
Communication path between two neighbors. A link is up when communication is possible
between the two end points.
Packets that contain information about the state of adjacencies to neighboring systems.
LSP
See label-switched path (LSP) and link-state PDU (LSP).
LSR
Label-switching router. A router on which MPLS and RSVP are enabled and is thus capable of
processing label-switched packets.
mask
MBone
MED
mesh
MIB
See subnet mask.
Internet multicast backbone. An interconnected set of subnetworks and routers that support
the delivery of IP multicast traffic. The MBone is a virtual network that is layered on top of
sections of the physical Internet.
Multiple exit discriminator. Optional BGP path attribute consisting of a metric value that is
used to determine the exit point to a destination when all other factors in determining the
exit point are equal.
Network topology in which devices are organized in a manageable, segmented manner with
many, often redundant, interconnections between network nodes.
Management Information Base. Definition of an object that can be managed by SNMP.
MPLS
Multiprotocol Label Switching. Mechanism for engineering network traffic patterns that
functions by assigning to network packets short labels that describe how to forward them
through the network. Also called label switching. See also traffic engineering.
MTBF
Mean time between failure. Measure of hardware component reliability.
MTU
multicast
Multiprotocol Label
Switching
228
Small random variation introduced into the value of a timer to prevent multiple timer
expirations from becoming synchronized.
Maximum transfer unit. Limit on packet size for a network.
Operation of sending network traffic from one network node to multiple network nodes.
See MPLS.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Glossary
N
neighbor
NET
Network Time Protocol
NIC
NSAP
n-selector
NTP
O
Network entity title. Network address defined by the ISO network architecture and used in
CLNS-based networks.
See NTP.
Network Information Center. Internet authority responsible for assigning Internet-related
numbers, such as IP addresses and autonomous system numbers. See also IANA.
Network service access point. Connection to a network that is identified by a network
address.
Last byte of a nonclient peer address.
Network Time Protocol. Protocol used to synchronize computer clock times on a network.
OC
Optical Carrier. In SONET, Optical Carrier levels indicate the transmission rate of digital
signals on optical fiber.
OSI
Open System Interconnection. Standard reference model for how messages are transmitted
between two points on a network.
OSPF
P
Adjacent system reachable by traversing a single subnetwork. An immediately adjacent
router. Also called a peer.
package
Packet Forwarding
Engine
PCI
PCMCIA
PDU
PE router
peer
PFE
Physical Interface Card
PIC
Open Shortest Path First. A link-state IGP that makes routing decisions based on the
shortest-path-first (SPF) algorithm (also referred to as the Dijkstra algorithm).
A collection of files that make up a JUNOS software component.
The architectural portion of the router that processes packets by forwarding them between
input and output interfaces.
Peripheral Component Interconnect. Standard, high-speed bus for connecting computer
peripherals. Used on the Routing Engine.
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Industry group that promotes
standards for credit card-size memory or I/O devices.
Protocol data unit. IS-IS packets.
Provider edge router. A router in the service provider's network that is connected to a
customer edge (CE) device and that participates in a Virtual Private Network (VPN).
An immediately adjacent router with which a protocol relationship has been established. Also
called a neighbor.
See Packet Forwarding Engine.
See PIC.
Physical Interface Card. A network interface–specific card that can be installed on an FPC in
the router.
Glossary
229
Glossary
PIM
Protocol Independent Multicast. A protocol-independent multicast routing protocol. PIM
Sparse Mode routes to multicast groups that might span wide-area and interdomain
internets. PIM Dense Mode is a flood-and-prune protocol.
PLP
Packet Loss Priority.
policing
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol. Link-layer protocol that provides multiprotocol encapsulation. It is
used for link-layer and network-layer configuration.
preference
Desirability of a route to become the active route. A route with a lower preference value is
more likely to become the active route. The preference is an arbitrary value in the range 0
through 255 that the routing protocol process uses to rank routes received from different
protocols, interfaces, or remote systems.
primary interface
Protocol-Independent
Multicast
provider edge router
provider router
Q
QoS
quality of service
R
RADIUS
Random Early
Detection
rate limiting
RBOC
RDRAM
RED
Resource Reservation
Protocol
RFC
230
Applying rate limits on bandwidth and burst size for traffic on a particular interface.
Router interface that packets go out when no interface name is specified and when the
destination address does not imply a particular outgoing interface.
See PIM.
See PE router.
Router in the service provider’s network that does not attach to a customer edge (CE) device.
Quality of service. Performance, such as transmission rates and error rates, of a
communications channel or system.
See QoS.
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. Authentication method for validating users who
attempt to access the router using Telnet.
See RED.
See policing.
(Pronounced “are-bock”) Regional Bell operating company. Regional telephone companies
formed as a result of the divestiture of the Bell System.
RAMBUS dynamic random access memory.
(Pronounced “red”) Random Early Detection. Gradual drop profile for a given class that is
used for congestion avoidance. RED tries to anticipate incipient congestion and reacts by
dropping a small percentage of packets from the head of the queue to ensure that a queue
never actually becomes congested.
See RSVP.
Request for Comments. Internet standard specifications published by the Internet
Engineering Task Force.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Glossary
RFI
Radio frequency interference. Interference from high-frequency electromagnetic waves
emanating from electronic devices.
RIP
Routing Information Protocol. Distance-vector interior gateway protocol that makes routing
decisions based on hop count.
routing domain
See AS.
Routing Engine
Architectural portion of the router that handles all routing protocol processes, as well as other
software processes that control the router’s interfaces, some of the chassis components,
system management, and user access to the router.
routing table
rpd
RPM
S
Common database of routes learned from one or more routing protocols. All routes are
maintained by the JUNOS routing protocol process.
JUNOS software routing protocol process (daemon). User-level background process
responsible for starting, managing, and stopping the routing protocols on a Juniper Networks
router.
Reverse path multicasting. Routing algorithm used by DVMRP to forward multicast traffic.
RSVP
Resource Reservation Protocol. Resource reservation setup protocol designed to interact with
integrated services on the Internet.
SAP
Session Announcement Protocol. Used with multicast protocols to handle session conference
announcements.
SAR
Segmentation and reassembly. Buffering used with ATM.
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. CCITT variation of SONET standard.
SDP
Session Description Protocol. Used with multicast protocols to handle session conference
announcements.
SDRAM
Synchronous dynamic random access memory.
secure shell
See SSH.
shortest-path-first
algorithm
See SPF.
simplex interface
An interface that assumes that packets it receives from itself are the result of a software
loopback process. The interface does not consider these packets when determining whether
the interface is functional.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol governing network management and the
monitoring of network devices and their functions.
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network. High-speed (up to 2.5 Gbps) synchronous network
specification developed by Bellcore and designed to run on optical fiber. STS-1 is the basic
building block of SONET. Approved as an international standard in 1988. See also SDH.
SPF
Shortest-path first, an algorithm used by IS-IS and OSPF to make routing decisions based on
the state of network links. Also called the Dijkstra algorithm.
Glossary
231
Glossary
SSH
SSRAM
STM
Secure shell. Software that provides a secured method of logging in to a remote network
system.
Synchronous Static Random Access Memory.
Synchronous Transport Module. CCITT specification for SONET at 155.52 Mbps.
STS
Synchronous Transport Signal. Synchronous Transport Signal level 1. Basic building block
signal of SONET, operating at 51.84 Mbps. Faster SONET rates are defined as STS-n, where n
is a multiple of 51.84 Mbps. See also SONET.
subnet mask
Number of bits of the network address used for host portion of a Class A, Class B, or Class C
IP address.
Switch Interface Board
sysid
T
System identifier. Portion of the ISO nonclient peer. The sysid can be any 6 bytes that are
unique throughout a domain.
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol. Works in conjunction with Internet Protocol (IP) to send data
over the Internet. Divides a message into packets and tracks the packets from point of origin
to destination.
ToS
Type of service.
traffic engineering
tunnel
type of service
U
See SIB.
unicast
UPS
Process of selecting the paths chosen by data traffic in order to balance the traffic load on the
various links, routers, and switches in the network. (Definition from
http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-mpls-framework-04.txt.) See also MPLS.
Private, secure path through an otherwise public network.
See ToS.
Operation of sending network traffic from one network node to another individual network
node.
Uninterruptible power supply. Device that sits between a power supply and a router (or other
piece of equipment) the prevents undesired power-source events, such as outages and surges,
from affecting or damaging the device.
V
vapor corrosion
inhibitor
VCI
Vapor corrosion inhibitor. Small cylinder packed with the router that prevents corrosion of
the chassis and components during shipment.
VCI
Virtual circuit identifier. 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell that indicates the particular
virtual circuit the cell takes through a virtual path. Also called a logical interface. See also VPI.
virtual circuit identifier
232
See VCI.
See VCI.
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Glossary
virtual path identifier
See VPI.
Virtual Router
Redundancy Protocol
See VRRP.
VPI
VRRP
W
wavelength-division
multiplexing
WDM
weighted round-robin
WRR
virtual path identifier. 8-bit field in the header of an ATM cell that indicates the virtual path
the cell takes. See also VCI.
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. On Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, allows
you to configure virtual default routers.
See WDM.
Wavelength-division multiplexing. Technique for transmitting a mix of voice, data, and video
over various wavelengths (colors) of light.
See WRR.
Weighted round-robin. Scheme used to decide the queue from which the next packet should
be transmitted.
Glossary
233
Glossary
234
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Part
6
Index
„ Index on page 237
235
236
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
Index
Index
A
AC power cord
connection instructions
during initial installation..............................123
for maintenance..........................................140
disconnection instructions..................................140
specifications .......................................................45
AC power supply
description (hardware and function).....................21
grounding.............................................................45
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................118
for maintenance or replacement.................138
integrated fan.......................................................23
LEDs.....................................................................22
maintenance ......................................................135
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................101
for maintenance or replacement.................137
serial number .....................................................218
specifications .......................................................21
tools required .....................................................135
troubleshooting ..................................................195
weight ..................................................................99
agency approvals.........................................................84
air filter
description (hardware and function).....................23
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................112
for maintenance or replacement.................155
maintenance ......................................................154
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................107
for maintenance or replacement.................154
routine inspection of ..........................................133
tools required .....................................................153
weight ..................................................................99
airflow
path through chassis (graphic depiction) ..............24
required clearance................................................42
alarm
cutoff button ........................................................18
handling by Routing Engine .................................34
LEDs (red and yellow) on craft interface...............18
messages, list of .................................................192
relay contacts
connecting/disconnecting wire ....................188
description ....................................................18
wire specifications.........................................53
altitude, acceptable range ............................................43
antistatic mat, using ....................................................91
application-specific integrated circuit See ASIC
approvals, agency........................................................84
architecture
overview...............................................................31
Packet Forwarding Engine....................................32
Routing Engine .....................................................33
ASIC
as key element of router design .............................3
Distributed Buffer Manager
component on backplane..............................10
role in forwarding .........................................33
I/O Manager
component on FPC .......................................12
role in forwarding .........................................33
Internet Processor or Internet Processor II
component on SCB .......................................13
role in forwarding .........................................33
on FPC .................................................................12
on PIC ..................................................................10
on SCB .................................................................13
ATM analyzer, use of .................................................182
attenuation in fiber-optic cable ....................................50
auxiliary port on craft interface
cable
connecting during initial installation............120
connector pinouts (DB-9).............................208
replacement instructions.............................187
specifications ................................................53
description ...........................................................19
B
backplane ....................................................................10
brackets (mounting).....................................................94
Index
237
Index
C
cable
auxiliary or console port on craft interface
connecting during initial installation ........... 120
replacing for maintenance .......................... 187
tools required.............................................. 181
DC power and grounding
connecting during initial installation ........... 123
connecting for maintenance ....................... 149
disconnecting.............................................. 147
tools required.............................................. 181
Ethernet port on craft interface
connecting during initial installation ........... 120
replacing for maintenance .......................... 186
tools required.............................................. 181
fiber-optic
attenuation ................................................... 50
cleaning instructions for transceivers.......... 213
dispersion ..................................................... 50
maintenance............................................... 182
multimode and single-mode ......................... 50
transmission distance, maximum ................. 50
wavelength ranges ........................................ 50
grounding See DC power and grounding cables
management system
description.................................................... 24
installation instructions ............................... 115
removal instructions ................................... 104
use in cable maintenance ........................... 182
weight........................................................... 99
PIC
connecting during initial installation ........... 121
connecting during maintenance.................. 184
disconnecting.............................................. 183
maintenance............................................... 182
tools required.............................................. 181
carton See shipping crate
center-mount rack See rack
chassis
alarm messages See alarm, messages
description ............................................................. 8
dimensions ............................................................ 5
lifting guidelines................................................... 71
path of airflow through ........................................ 24
checklist
FPC removal ...................................................... 105
site preparation.................................................... 54
chromatic dispersion in fiber-optic cable..................... 50
cleaning instructions for fiber-optic transceivers ....... 213
clearance, around chassis............................................ 42
CLI
as troubleshooting tool....................................... 191
command
to display chassis alarm messages .............. 192
to display FPC status................................... 162
to display PIC status.................................... 162
to display power supply status .................... 135
238
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
to display Routing Engine status .................174
to display serial number..............................216
tools provided in
for accessing and controlling software ..........30
for monitoring software ................................30
command-line interface See CLI
commands
ping....................................................................191
show chassis alarms...........................................192
show chassis environment
for fan tray..................................................155
for impeller assemblies ...............................157
for power supplies ......................................135
show chassis fpc ................................................162
show chassis hardware ......................................216
show chassis routing-engine...............................174
show chassis scb ................................................169
traceroute...........................................................191
compatibility, electromagnetic ....................................49
compliance
EMC requirements ...............................................86
general standards.................................................84
components
field-replaceable See field-replaceable units
hot-pluggable See field-replaceable units
hot-removable and hot-insertable See
field-replaceable units
redundancy ............................................................4
requiring power-down See field-replaceable units
software See JUNOS Internet software
configuration
files, storage by Routing Engine ...........................34
JUNOS Internet software ....................................127
console port on craft interface
cable
connecting during initial installation ...........120
connector pinouts (DB-9) ............................208
replacement instructions.............................187
specifications ................................................53
description ...........................................................19
control packets, handling of ........................................13
cooling system
description (hardware and function) ....................23
maintenance ......................................................153
See also air filter, fan tray, lower impeller assembly,
power supply fan, upper impeller assembly
troubleshooting ..................................................198
cord, AC power See AC power cord
craft interface
alarm
cutoff button .................................................18
relay contacts See alarm relay contacts
description (hardware and function) ....................17
LCD ......................................................................19
Index
LEDs
alarm (red and yellow) ..................................18
FPC ...............................................................18
routine inspection of ..........................................133
Routing Engine ports See auxiliary port on craft
interface, console port on craft interface, Ethernet
port on craft interface
crate See shipping crate
D
data flow, through Packet Forwarding Engine .............33
DB-9 cable connector pinouts (auxiliary and console
ports) .....................................................................208
DC power and grounding cables
connection instructions
during initial installation..............................123
for maintenance or replacement.................149
disconnection instructions..................................147
lugs ......................................................................46
specifications .......................................................46
tools required .....................................................181
DC power supply
cables See DC power and grounding cables
description (hardware and function).....................22
grounding.............................................................45
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................118
for maintenance or replacement.................144
integrated fan.......................................................23
LEDs.....................................................................22
maintenance ......................................................135
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................101
for maintenance or replacement.................142
serial number .....................................................218
specifications .......................................................22
tools required .....................................................135
troubleshooting ..................................................195
weight ..................................................................99
dispersion in fiber-optic cable......................................50
Distributed Buffer Manager ASIC
component on backplane.....................................10
role in forwarding.................................................33
documentation feedback ............................................ xxi
E
E1 PIC pinouts for RJ-48 cable ...................................208
earthquakes
site preparation for...............................................41
tested toleration for shock....................................43
EIA rack standards ......................................................40
electrical specifications See specifications
electricity
safety warnings ....................................................60
site wiring guidelines............................................49
electromagnetic
compatibility See EMC
pulse.....................................................................49
electrostatic bag, using to store components ...............91
EMC (EMI)
compliance with requirements .............................86
suppression ..........................................................49
EMP.............................................................................49
environmental specifications .......................................43
ESD, preventing damage to components by ................91
Ethernet port on craft interface
cable
connecting during initial installation............120
replacement instructions.............................186
specifications ................................................53
description ...........................................................19
ETSI rack standards .....................................................40
exception packets, handling of ....................................13
F
fan tray
description (hardware and function).....................23
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................116
for maintenance or replacement .................156
maintenance ......................................................155
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................103
for maintenance or replacement .................156
tools required .....................................................153
troubleshooting ..................................................198
weight ..................................................................99
fan, power supply........................................................23
Fast Ethernet 12-port PIC, pinouts for RJ-21 cable .....211
field-replaceable units....................................................4
fire safety specifications ..............................................43
Flexible PIC Concentrator See FPC
forwarding tables.........................................................28
FPC
ASICs on...............................................................12
blank panels .........................................................11
components .........................................................12
description (hardware and function).....................11
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................114
for maintenance or replacement .................165
LEDs.....................................................................18
maintenance ......................................................162
offline button........................................................18
removal checklist ...............................................105
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................105
for maintenance or replacement .................163
Index
239
Index
serial number..................................................... 217
status, checking ................................................. 162
tools required..................................................... 161
troubleshooting .................................................. 201
weight .................................................................. 99
front-mount rack See rack
FRUs See field-replaceable units
G
grounding (electrical) specifications............................. 45
guidelines See specifications
H
hardware components
backplane ............................................................ 10
fan in power supply ............................................. 23
fan tray ................................................................ 23
FPC ...................................................................... 12
impeller assemblies.............................................. 23
packing for shipment ......................................... 221
PIC ....................................................................... 11
reinstallation of all during initial installation....... 111
removal of all during initial installation .............. 100
return for repair or replacement ........................ 215
Routing Engine..................................................... 15
SCB ...................................................................... 13
weight .................................................................. 99
higher-order mode loss (HOL) ..................................... 50
hot-pluggable components See field-replaceable units
hot-removable and hot-insertable components See
field-replaceable units
humidity (relative), acceptable .................................... 43
I
240
I/O Manager ASIC
on FPC ................................................................. 12
role in forwarding ................................................ 33
impeller assembly See lower impeller assembly, upper
impeller assembly
installation instructions
AC power cord
during initial installation ............................. 123
for maintenance or replacement................. 140
AC power supply
during initial installation ............................. 118
for maintenance or replacement................. 138
air filter
during initial installation ............................. 112
for maintenance or replacement................. 155
alarm relay contact wires
during initial installation ............................. 121
for maintenance or replacement................. 188
cable management system ................................ 115
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
cable, auxiliary or console port on craft interface
during initial installation .............................120
for maintenance or replacement.................187
cable, Ethernet port on craft interface
during initial installation .............................120
for maintenance or replacement.................186
cable, PIC
during initial installation .............................121
for maintenance or replacement.................184
DC power and grounding cables
during initial installation .............................123
for maintenance or replacement.................149
DC power supply
during initial installation .............................118
for maintenance or replacement.................144
fan tray
during initial installation .............................116
for maintenance or replacement.................156
FPC
during initial installation .............................114
for maintenance or replacement.................165
lower impeller assembly
during initial installation .............................111
for maintenance or replacement.................159
LS-120 drive .......................................................180
PIC
quad-wide ...................................................165
regular ........................................................168
router
preparation for..............................................89
tools required................................................97
using mechanical lift .....................................98
without mechanical lift..................................99
Routing Engine...................................................178
Routing Engine housing
during initial installation .............................117
for maintenance or replacement.................175
SCB
during initial installation .............................113
for maintenance or replacement.................171
upper impeller assembly
during initial installation .............................117
for maintenance or replacement.................160
instructions
calculation
power budget................................................51
power margin ...............................................51
cleaning fiber-optic transceivers .........................213
installation See installation instructions
maintenance
AC power supply.........................................135
air filter .......................................................154
cables, fiber-optic........................................182
cables, PIC ..................................................182
cooling system ............................................153
DC power supply.........................................135
fan tray .......................................................155
Index
general guidelines .........................................79
impeller assemblies ....................................157
PIC ..............................................................162
Routing Engine ...........................................174
SCB .............................................................169
packing
hardware components for shipment ...........221
router for shipment.....................................220
removal See removal instructions
return router or components..............................215
site preparation ....................................................39
unpack the router.................................................92
interface
command-line See CLI
process (software module in Routing Engine).......29
interference
electromagnetic....................................................49
radio frequency ....................................................49
Internet Processor or Internet Processor II ASIC
component on SCB ..............................................13
role in forwarding.................................................33
J
Juniper Networks Technical Assistance
Center (JTAC) .........................................................194
JUNOS Internet software
CLI See CLI
configuration......................................................127
interface process ..................................................29
kernel (Routing Engine) ........................................29
management process ...........................................29
MIB II process ......................................................29
modularity and scalability ....................................34
overview ..............................................................25
role in system architecture ...................................33
routing protocol process.......................................26
SNMP process ......................................................29
tools
for accessing and configuring........................30
for monitoring...............................................30
upgrade of............................................................30
K
kernel (software in Routing Engine).............................29
L
laser safety guidelines .................................................76
LCD on craft interface .................................................19
LEDs
AC power supply ..................................................22
alarm (red and yellow on craft interface)
description ....................................................18
troubleshooting use.....................................192
DC power supply ..................................................22
FPC ......................................................................18
PIC .......................................................................11
Routing Engine .....................................................15
safety warnings ....................................................76
SCB ......................................................................13
lifting handle (for installation) ....................................109
link loss .......................................................................51
load sharing (power supplies) ......................................45
lower impeller assembly
description (hardware and function).....................23
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................111
for maintenance or replacement .................159
maintenance ......................................................157
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................108
for maintenance or replacement .................158
tools required .....................................................153
troubleshooting ..................................................198
weight ..................................................................99
LS-120 drive
replacement instructions ....................................180
tools required .....................................................173
lugs for DC power and grounding cables .....................46
M
maintenance guidelines
AC power supply ................................................135
air filter ..............................................................154
cable
fiber-optic....................................................182
PIC ..............................................................182
cooling system ...................................................153
DC power supply ................................................135
fan tray...............................................................155
FPC ....................................................................162
impeller assemblies............................................157
overview.............................................................133
PIC .....................................................................162
Routing Engine ...................................................174
SCB ....................................................................169
management
port, Ethernet See Ethernet port on craft interface
process (software module of Routing Engine).......29
MIB II process (software module in Routing Engine)....29
modal dispersion in fiber-optic cable ...........................50
mode loss, higher-order...............................................50
multicast routing protocols ..........................................26
multimode fiber-optic cable See cable, fiber-optic
O
offline button for FPC ..................................................18
Index
241
Index
P
Packet Forwarding Engine
architectural components..................................... 32
ASICs, diagram of ................................................ 32
components ........................................................... 9
cooling subsystem See lower impeller assembly,
upper impeller assembly
data flow through................................................. 33
packing crate See shipping crate
Physical Interface Card See PIC
PIC
ASIC on ................................................................ 10
cable
installation instructions ............................... 184
removal instructions ................................... 183
tools required.............................................. 181
components ......................................................... 11
description (hardware and function) .................... 10
E1 pinouts for RJ-48 cable .................................. 208
Fast Ethernet 12-port, pinouts for RJ-21 cable.... 211
installation instructions
quad-wide ................................................... 165
regular ........................................................ 168
LEDs .................................................................... 11
maintenance ...................................................... 162
removal instructions
quad-wide ................................................... 163
regular ........................................................ 167
serial number..................................................... 217
SONET/SDH
alarm messages .......................................... 192
power budget, calculating ............................. 51
status, checking ................................................. 162
T1 pinouts for RJ-48 cable .................................. 208
tools required..................................................... 161
troubleshooting .................................................. 202
ping command.......................................................... 191
pinouts
DB-9 cable connector ports (auxiliary/console)... 208
RJ-21 cable......................................................... 211
RJ-45 Ethernet cable connector port................... 207
RJ-48 cable......................................................... 208
policy, routing ............................................................. 28
port
auxiliary on craft interface See auxiliary port on craft
interface
console on craft interface See console port on craft
interface
Ethernet on craft interface See Ethernet port on craft
interface
power
budget calculation ................................................ 51
cables and cords See AC power cords, DC power
and grounding cables
connecting to AC-powered router
during initial installation ............................. 123
for maintenance ......................................... 140
242
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
connecting to DC-powered router
during initial installation .............................123
for maintenance..........................................149
disconnecting
from AC-powered router .............................140
from DC-powered router .............................147
margin calculation................................................51
supply See AC power supply, DC power supply
surges...................................................................49
system
load sharing ..................................................45
redundancy...................................................45
requirements ................................................48
specifications ................................................44
tools required..............................................135
R
rack
airflow clearance requirement..............................42
mounting hole spacing .........................................41
securing to building..............................................41
size and strength required....................................40
standards, EIA and ETSI .......................................40
radio frequency interference, preventing.....................49
redundancy
components ...........................................................4
cooling system .....................................................23
fan tray ................................................................23
impeller assemblies..............................................23
power system.......................................................45
regulatory compliance .................................................55
relative humidity, acceptable.......................................43
removal instructions
AC power cord ...................................................140
AC power supply
during initial installation .............................101
for maintenance or replacement.................137
air filter
during initial installation .............................107
for maintenance or replacement.................154
alarm relay contact wires ...................................188
cable
auxiliary or console port on craft
interface ..................................................187
Ethernet port on craft interface...................186
management system...................................104
PIC ..............................................................183
DC power and grounding cables.........................147
DC power supply
during initial installation .............................101
for maintenance or replacement.................142
fan tray
during initial installation .............................103
for maintenance or replacement.................156
Index
FPC
during initial installation..............................105
for maintenance or replacement.................163
lower impeller assembly
during initial installation..............................108
for maintenance or replacement.................158
LS-120 drive .......................................................180
PIC
quad-wide ...................................................163
regular ........................................................167
Routing Engine...................................................177
Routing Engine housing
during initial installation..............................102
for maintenance or replacement.................175
SCB
during initial installation..............................106
for maintenance or replacement.................170
upper impeller assembly
during initial installation..............................102
for maintenance or replacement.................159
repair of router or components .................................215
replacement instructions See installation instructions,
removal instructions
requirements See specifications
reset button on Routing Engine ...................................15
Return Materials Authorization number.....................215
RFI ..............................................................................49
RJ-21 cable pinouts....................................................211
RJ-45 cable connector pinouts ...................................207
RJ-48 cable pinouts....................................................208
RMA number .............................................................215
routing
policy ...................................................................28
protocol process (software module of Routing
Engine) .............................................................26
protocols ..............................................................26
tables ...................................................................28
Routing Engine
alarm handling by ................................................34
architecture ..........................................................34
components
hardware ......................................................15
software ........................................................26
configuration files, storage ...................................34
description (hardware and function).....................15
installation instructions ......................................178
interface process ..................................................29
kernel...................................................................29
LEDs.....................................................................15
maintenance ......................................................174
management process ...........................................29
MIB II process ......................................................29
packet counting....................................................34
ports on craft interface
cable and wire specifications.........................53
description ....................................................19
See also auxiliary port on craft interface, console
port on craft interface, Ethernet port
on craft interface
tools required ..............................................181
removal instructions...........................................177
reset button..........................................................15
role in system architecture ...................................33
routing
protocol process............................................26
table maintenance.........................................34
serial number .....................................................218
SNMP process.......................................................29
status, displaying................................................174
tools required .....................................................173
Routing Engine housing
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................117
for maintenance or replacement .................175
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................102
for maintenance or replacement .................175
tools required .....................................................173
weight ..................................................................99
S
safety information (See also warnings).........................55
SCB
ASICs on...............................................................13
components .........................................................13
description (hardware and function).....................13
installation instructions
during initial installation..............................113
for maintenance or replacement .................171
LEDs.....................................................................13
maintenance ......................................................169
removal instructions
during initial installation..............................106
for maintenance or replacement .................170
serial number .....................................................219
status, checking..................................................169
tools required .....................................................161
troubleshooting ..................................................202
weight ..................................................................99
serial number
AC power supply ................................................218
DC power supply ................................................218
FPC ....................................................................217
in output from show chassis hardware
command .......................................................216
PIC .....................................................................217
Routing Engine ...................................................218
SCB ....................................................................219
Index
243
Index
shipping crate
repacking the router........................................... 220
unpacking the router............................................ 92
shock (earthquake), tested level .................................. 43
show chassis alarms command ................................. 192
show chassis environment command
for fan tray......................................................... 155
for impeller assemblies ...................................... 157
for power supplies.............................................. 135
show chassis fpc command....................................... 162
show chassis hardware command............................. 216
show chassis routing-engine command ..................... 174
show chassis scb command ...................................... 169
signal dispersion ......................................................... 50
signaling, distance limitations ..................................... 49
Simple Network Management Protocol See SNMP
single-mode fiber-optic cable See cable, fiber-optic
site
electrical wiring specifications.............................. 49
environmental specifications ............................... 43
preparation
checklist........................................................ 54
instructions ................................................... 39
routine inspection .............................................. 133
SNMP
as tool for monitoring .......................................... 30
process (software module in Routing Engine) ...... 29
software, JUNOS See JUNOS Internet software
SONET/SDH analyzer, use of ..................................... 182
specifications
AC power
cord .............................................................. 45
supply ........................................................... 21
cable
DC power and grounding .............................. 46
Routing Engine ports on craft interface......... 53
DC power supply.................................................. 22
electrical
cable and wiring ........................................... 49
grounding ..................................................... 45
environmental...................................................... 43
fire safety............................................................. 43
power system ...................................................... 44
rack
connection to building structure ................... 41
mounting hole spacing.................................. 41
size and strength........................................... 40
wires to external alarm-reporting devices ............ 53
standards compliance ................................................. 84
support, obtaining ..................................................... 194
surge protection .......................................................... 49
system
architecture.......................................................... 31
description ............................................................. 3
System Control Board See SCB
244
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide
T
T1 PIC pinouts for RJ-48 cable ...................................208
tables, routing and forwarding ....................................28
technical support, obtaining ......................................194
telco rack See rack
temperature, acceptable range ....................................43
tolerances....................................................................43
tools required
cable maintenance .............................................181
cooling system maintenance ..............................153
Packet Forwarding Engine maintenance ............161
power system maintenance ...............................135
router
installation ....................................................97
unpacking .....................................................89
Routing Engine maintenance .............................173
traceroute command .................................................191
traffic engineering protocols........................................26
transmission distances, fiber-optic cable .....................50
troubleshooting
CLI commands ...................................................191
cooling system ...................................................198
FPC ....................................................................201
LEDs
craft interface..............................................192
hardware components ................................192
overview of tools ................................................191
PIC .....................................................................202
power system.....................................................195
SCB ....................................................................202
U
U (rack unit) ................................................................40
unicast routing protocols .............................................26
upper impeller assembly
description (hardware and function) ....................23
installation instructions
during initial installation .............................117
for maintenance or replacement.................160
maintenance ......................................................157
removal instructions
during initial installation .............................102
for maintenance or replacement.................159
tools required .....................................................153
troubleshooting ..................................................198
weight ..................................................................99
Index
W
warnings
electrical...............................................................60
general .................................................................57
installation ...........................................................71
laser and LED .......................................................76
levels defined .......................................................55
maintenance and operational...............................79
weight
fully configured router..........................................40
hardware components .........................................99
wiring, electrical See electricity ....................................49
Index
245
Index
246
M40 Internet Router Hardware Guide